Yamaha RX-V520RDS Manual de usuario
- Categoría
- Receptores AV
- Tipo
- Manual de usuario
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.
YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA
YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY
YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND
YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN
YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA
RX-V520RDS
Natural Sound AV Receiver
Ampli-tuner audio-vidéo
G B
OWNER’S MANUAL
MODE D’EMPLOI
BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG
BRUKSANVISNING
MANUALE DI ISTRUZIONI
MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES
GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING
RX-V520RDS
Printed in Malaysia ID
V723020
00RX-V520RDS(ML)-cv1/4 2/1/1, 4:41 PM1
CAUTION
CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.
1 To assure the finest performance, please read this
manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future
reference.
2 Install this unit in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean
place with at least 30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the
right and left, and 10 cm at the back of this unit for
ventilation space — away from direct sunlight, heat
sources, vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold.
3 Locate this unit away from other electrical
appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid
humming sounds. To prevent fire or electrical shock,
do not place this unit where it may get exposed to
rain, water, and/or any type of liquid.
4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature
changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this unit
in a environment with high humidity (i.e. a room with
a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside this unit,
which may cause an electrical shock, fire, damage to
this unit, and/or personal injury.
5 On the top of this unit, do not place:
– Other components, as they may cause damage
and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit.
– Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause
fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
– Containers with liquid in them, as they may cause
electrical shock to the user and/or damage to this
unit.
6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth,
curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If
the temperature inside this unit rises, it may cause
fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all
connections are complete.
8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may
overheat, possibly causing damage.
9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords.
10 When disconnecting the power cord from the wall
outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cord.
11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this
might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.
12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used.
Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified is
dangerous and may cause fire, damage to this unit,
and/or personal injury. YAMAHA will not be held
responsible for any damage resulting from use of this
unit with a voltage other than specified.
13 To prevent damage by lightning, disconnect the
power cord from the wall outlet during an electrical
storm.
14 Take care of this unit so that no foreign objects and/
or liquid drops inside this unit.
15 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact
qualified YAMAHA service personnel when any
service is needed. The cabinet should never be
opened for any reasons.
16 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of
time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug
from the wall outlet.
17 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section
on common operating errors before concluding that
this unit is faulty.
18 Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set
this unit in the standby mode, and disconnect the AC
power plug from the wall outlet.
This unit is not disconnected from the AC power source
as long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even if this
unit itself is turned off. This state is called the standby
mode. In this state, this unit is designed to consume a
very small quantity of power.
■ For U.K. customers
If the socket outlets in the home are not suitable for the plug
supplied with this appliance, it should be cut off and an
appropriate 3 pin plug fitted. For details, refer to the
instructions described below.
Note
• The plug severed from the mains lead must be destroyed, as a
plug with bared flexible cord is hazardous if engaged in a live
socket outlet.
■ Special Instructions for U.K. Model
IMPORTANT
THE WIRES IN MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN
ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE:
Blue: NEUTRAL
Brown: LIVE
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this
apparatus may not correspond with the coloured
markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed
as follows:
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to
the terminal which is marked with the letter N or
coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN
must be connected to the terminal which is marked with
the letter L or coloured RED.
Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth
terminal of the three pin plug.
0101V520RDS_caution_EN 1/31/1, 4:20 PM2
11
English
BASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERA
TION
APPENDIX
PREPARATION
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION
FEATURES .......................................................... 2
GETTING STARTED ......................................... 3
Checking the Package Contents ............................. 3
Battery Installation in the Remote Control ............ 3
Battery Replacement .............................................. 3
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ....................... 4
Front Panel ............................................................. 4
Remote Control ...................................................... 6
Using the Remote Control ...................................... 7
Display ................................................................... 8
Rear Panel .............................................................. 9
PREPARATION
SPEAKER SETUP ............................................ 10
Speakers to Be Used ............................................ 10
Speaker Placement ............................................... 10
CONNECTIONS ............................................... 11
Before Connecting Components ........................... 11
Connecting Audio Components ........................... 12
Connecting an External Decoder ......................... 12
Connecting Video Components ............................ 14
Connecting Speakers ............................................ 16
IMPEDANCE SELECTOR Switch ..................... 18
Connecting the Power Supply Cords ................... 18
ADJUSTING THE SPEAKER BALANCE .... 19
Before You Start Adjusting .................................. 19
Using the Test Tone .............................................. 19
BASIC OPERATION
PLAYING A SOURCE ...................................... 21
Input Modes and Indications ................................ 23
Selecting a DSP Program ..................................... 24
Canceling the Sound Effect (turning off the effect
speakers) ........................................................... 25
TUNING ............................................................. 26
Connecting the Antennas ..................................... 26
Automatic Tuning ................................................ 27
Manual Tuning ..................................................... 27
Automatic Preset Tuning
(for RDS stations only) .................................... 28
Manual Preset Tuning .......................................... 29
To Recall a Preset Station .................................... 29
Exchanging Preset Stations .................................. 30
RECEIVING RDS STATIONS ........................ 31
Description of RDS Data ..................................... 31
Changing the RDS Mode ..................................... 31
PTY SEEK Function ............................................ 32
EON Function ...................................................... 33
RECORDING A SOURCE ............................... 34
ADVANCED OPERATION
SET MENU ......................................................... 35
Adjusting the Items on the SET MENU .............. 35
1 SPEAKER SET (speaker mode settings) .......... 36
2 HP TONE CTRL (headphone tone control) ...... 37
3 I/O ASSIGN ...................................................... 37
4 INPUT MODE (initial input mode) .................. 38
5 DOLBY D. SET (Dolby Digital set) ................. 38
6 DTS SET (DTS LFE level) ............................... 38
7 SP DLY TIME (center delay) ............................ 39
8 DISPLAY SET .................................................. 39
9 MEM. GUARD (memory guard) ...................... 39
DELAY TIME AND SPEAKER OUTPUT
LEVELS .......................................................... 40
Delay Time ........................................................... 40
Sound Output Level of the Center, Right Rear
and Left Rear Speakers, and Subwoofer .......... 40
Adjusting Method ................................................ 41
SLEEP TIMER .................................................. 42
Setting the SLEEP Timer ..................................... 42
Canceling the SLEEP Timer ................................ 42
PRESET REMOTE CONTROL ...................... 43
Component Selector Buttons ............................... 43
Controlling the Components Connected to
This Unit .......................................................... 43
Description of Each Mode ................................... 44
Setting the Manufacturer Code ............................ 48
Returning to the Factory Setting .......................... 49
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM ............................ 50
Hi-Fi DSP Programs ............................................ 50
CINEMA DSP Programs ...................................... 50
APPENDIX
TROUBLESHOOTING .................................... 53
SPECIFICATIONS ............................................ 57
GLOSSARY ....................................................... 58
INDEX ................................................................ 60
0102V520RDS01-09_EN 1/31/1, 4:20 PM1
2
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby”, “AC-3”, “Pro Logic” and the double-D symbol are
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
Confidential Unpublished Works. ©1992-1997 Dolby Laboratories,
Inc. All rights reserved.
Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. US
Pat. No. 5,451,942 and other world-wide patents issued and
pending. “DTS” and “DTS Digital Surround” are trademarks of
Digital Theater Systems, Inc. Copyright 1996 Digital Theater
Systems, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
• y indicates a tip for your operation.
• Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the main unit or on the remote control. In cases when
the button names differ between the main unit and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in
parentheses in this manual.
5-Channel Power Amplification
◆ Minimum RMS Output
(0.06% THD, 20 Hz – 20 kHz)
Main: 70 W + 70 W (8 Ω)
Center: 70 W (8 Ω)
Rear: 70 W + 70 W (8 Ω)
Multi-mode Digital Sound Field
Processing
◆ DTS Decoder
◆ Dolby Pro Logic Decoder
◆ Dolby Digital Decoder
◆ Hi-Fi DSP
◆ CINEMA DSP: Combination of YAMAHA DSP
Technology and Dolby Digital, Dolby Pro Logic or
DTS
◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP
◆ SILENT CINEMA
Sophisticated FM/AM Tuner
◆ 40-Station Random Access Preset Tuning
◆ Automatic Preset Tuning
◆ Preset Station Shifting Capability (Preset Editing)
◆ Multi-Functions for RDS Broadcast Reception
Other Features
◆ 96-kHz/24-bit D/A Converter
◆ “SET MENU” which Provides You with 9 Items
for Optimizing This Unit for Your Audio/Video
System
◆ Test Tone Generator for Easier Speaker Balance
Adjustment
◆ 6-Channel External Decoder Input for Other Future
Formats
◆ Video Signal Input and Output Capability
(Including S Video Connections)
◆ Optical and Coaxial Digital Signal Input Jacks
◆ SLEEP Timer
◆ Remote Control with Preset Manufacturer Codes
FEATURES
0102V520RDS01-09_EN 1/31/1, 4:20 PM2
3
English
BASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERA
TION
APPENDIX
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
GETTING STARTED
Checking the Package Contents
Check that the following items are included in your package.
2
1
3
Remote control Batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4 type) AM loop antenna
Indoor FM antenna
75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter
(U.K. model only)
Battery Installation in the Remote
Control
1 Turn the remote control over and slide the
battery compartment cover in the direction of
the arrow.
2 Insert the batteries (AAA, R03 or UM-4 type)
according to the polarity markings on the
inside of the battery compartment.
3 Close the battery compartment cover.
Battery Replacement
If the remote control operates only when it is close to the
unit, the batteries are weak. Replace all the batteries with
new ones.
Be sure to replace the batteries within about two minutes.
If it takes longer than two minutes, the codes preset for
the remote control will return to the factory settings.
Notes
• Use only AAA, R03 or UM-4 batteries for replacement.
• Be sure the battery polarity is correct. (See the illustration inside
the battery compartment.)
• Remove the batteries if the remote control will not be used for an
extended period of time.
• If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid
touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with
clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before
installing new batteries.
Quick reference card
Connection guide
0102V520RDS01-09_EN 2/1/1, 2:24 PM3
4
SURROUND
DIGITAL
SILENT VIDEO AUX
PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL
6CH INPUTINPUT MODE
INPUT
VOLUME
RDS MODE/FREQ
EON
PTY SEEK
MODE START
TUNING
MODE
PRESET
/TUNING
FM/AM
MEMORY
EDIT
BASS BALANCE SPEAKERS
PROGRAM
PRESET/TUNINGEFFECT A/B/C/D/E
AB
OFF
ON
STANDBY
/ON
DIGITAL
– +
LR
TREBLE
– +
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO
6
1
2
3
7
9
0
8
q w
e
r
t
ds
p
fa g
u
o
i
y
5
4
6 EON
Press this button to select the desired program type (NEWS,
INFO, AFFAIRS, SPORT) when you want to tune in to a
radio program of that type automatically.
7 PTY SEEK START
Press this button to begin searching for a station after the
desired program type has been selected in the PTY SEEK
mode.
8 INPUT MODE
Press this button to select the input mode among AUTO,
DTS and ANALOG for the sources that send two or more
types of signals to this unit.
9 VOLUME
Turn this control to turn up or down the volume.
0 6CH INPUT
Press this button to select the source connected to the 6CH
INPUT jacks. The source selected by pressing 6CH INPUT
takes priority over the source selected with INPUT l / h
(or the input selector buttons on the remote control).
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
Front Panel
1 STANDBY/ON
Press this switch to turn on the power of this unit or to set
this unit in the standby mode. Before turning the power on,
set the volume at the minimum level.
Standby mode
In this mode, this unit consumes a very small quantity of
power to receive infrared-signals from the remote
control.
2 Remote control sensor
This receives signals from the remote control.
3 Display
This shows various information.
4 PTY SEEK MODE
Press this button to set the unit in the PTY SEEK mode.
5 RDS MODE/FREQ
When an RDS station is received, press this button to
change the display mode among the PS mode, PTY mode,
RT mode, CT mode (if the station offers those RDS data
services) and/or frequency display mode in turn.
0102V520RDS01-09_EN 1/31/1, 4:20 PM4
5
English
BASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERA
TION
APPENDIX
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
q BASS
Turn this control clockwise to increase or counterclockwise
to decrease the low-frequency response.
w TREBLE
Turn this control clockwise to increase or counterclockwise
to decrease the high-frequency response.
Note
• If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or the low-
frequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality from the
center and rear speakers may not match that of the left and right
main speakers.
e BALANCE
This control is only effective for the sound from the main
speakers.
Turn the control to adjust the balance of the output volume
from the right and left main speakers to compensate for
sound imbalance caused by the speaker location or listening
room conditions.
r SPEAKERS A/B
Set A or B (or both A and B) to the ON position for the main
speaker system (connected to this unit) that you want to use.
Set the button(s) to the OFF position for the main speaker
system that you don’t want to use.
t PROGRAM l / h
Press l or h to select a DSP program when the effect
speakers (center and rear) are turned on. The name of the
selected program appears on the display.
y EFFECT
Press this button to turn on or off the effect speakers (center
and rear). If you turn them off, all Dolby Digital and DTS
audio signals except for the LFE channel are directed to the
right and left main speakers. In that case, the output levels
of the right and left speakers may not match.
u PHONES jack
Connect the headphones to the PHONES jack so that this
unit outputs audio signals for private listening.
When listening with headphones privately, set both
SPEAKERS A/B to the OFF position.
i VIDEO AUX jacks
Connect an auxiliary audio or video input source such as a
game console to these jacks. To reproduce source signals
from these jacks, select V-AUX as the input source.
o PRESET/TUNING l / h
When “ z ” appears on the display:
This button is used to select a preset station number (1 to 8).
Press l to select a lower and h to select a higher preset
station number.
When “ z ” goes off from the display:
This button is used for tuning. Press l to tune in to lower
frequencies, and h to tune in to higher frequencies.
When this unit is in the PTY SEEK mode, press this button
to select a program type.
p A/B/C/D/E
Press this button to select one of 5 preset station groups (A
to E).
a PRESET/TUNING (EDIT)
Press this button to turn on or off “ z ” on the display and
switch the function between for storing a broadcasting
station (preset tuning) and for tuning. This button is also
used to exchange the assignment of two preset stations with
each other.
s MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM)
Press this button to store the broadcasting stations. Hold
down this button for more than 3 seconds to begin
automatic preset tuning (for FM stations only).
d TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)
Press this button to switch the tuning mode between
automatic and manual. To use the automatic tuning method,
press this button so that the “AUTO” indicator lights up on
the display. To use the manual tuning method, press this
button so that the “AUTO” indicator goes off.
f FM/AM
Press this button to switch the reception band between FM
and AM.
g INPUT l / h
Press these buttons to select the input source (DVD, AUX,
MD/CD-R, TUNER, CD, V-AUX, VCR, D-TV/CBL) that
you want to listen to or watch. The name of the selected
input source appears on the display.
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
0102V520RDS01-09_EN 1/31/1, 4:20 PM5
6
Remote Control
1 Indicator
This flashes in red when pressing a button on the remote
control. If it flashes rapidly several times, press the selected
button again.
2 Component selector buttons
Press one of these buttons which corresponds to the
component you want to control with the remote control.
(The proper code must be set for your component. Refer to
“Setting the Manufacturer Code”.) When the component
selector button has been pressed, the remote control is set to
that component operation mode.
3 POWER
Each time you press this button, the unit switches between
the power on and standby mode.
4 TEST
Press this button to output the test tone for each speaker.
5 A/B/C/D/E, PRESET –/+
These buttons are used to select a preset station.
A/B/C/D/E: To select one of a group (A to E) of preset
stations
PRESET –/+: To select a preset station number (1 to 8)
6 MUTE
Press this button to mute the sound. To cancel mute, press
this button again.
7 VOLUME
These buttons are used to adjust the volume level.
u: To turn up the volume
d: To turn down the volume
8 SLEEP
Press this button to set the SLEEP timer.
9 –/+
These buttons adjust the settings of the SET MENU and
TIME/LEVEL mode.
0 TIME/LEVEL
Press this button to select the items in the TIME/LEVEL
mode.
q Input selector buttons
These buttons select the input source.
CD: To play a CD
TUNER: To listen to an FM (RDS) or AM broadcast
MD/CD-R: To play an MD or CD recorder (or tape
deck)
DVD: To play a DVD
D-TV/CBL: To watch a TV/digital TV or cable TV
VCR: To play a video cassette
AUX: To use another audio component
V-AUX: To use another audio/video component
w 6CH INPUT
Press this button to play a source connected to the 6CH
INPUT jacks.
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
1
2
3
q
e
w
r
t
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
TV VOLUME
TV INPUT
Press
AMP(TUNER).
This section describes basic operation of this unit with the
remote control. First, press AMP(TUNER) on the
component selector. Refer to “PRESET REMOTE
CONTROL” for full details.
0102V520RDS01-09_EN 1/31/1, 4:20 PM6
7
English
BASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERA
TION
APPENDIX
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
Using the Remote Control
Remote control
sensor
Within approximately 6 m
(20 feet)
e EFFECT
Press this button to turn on or off the effect speakers (center
and rear).
r PRG+, PRG–
Press these buttons to select a DSP program.
Once you press SET MENU, these buttons are used for
selecting the SET MENU item.
t SET MENU
Press this button to select the items in the SET MENU.
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
The remote control transmits a directional infrared beam. Be
sure to aim the remote control directly at the infrared sensor
during operation. When the sensor is covered or there is a
large object between the remote control and the sensor, the
sensor cannot receive signals. The sensor may not be able to
receive signals properly when it is exposed to direct sunlight
or a strong artificial light (such as a fluorescent or strobe
light). In this case, change the direction of the light or
reposition the unit to avoid direct lighting.
Notes
• Handle the remote control with care.
• Do not spill water, tea or other liquids on the remote control.
• Do not drop the remote control.
• Do not leave or store the remote control in the following
conditions:
– high humidity or temperature such as near a heater, stove or
bath;
– dusty places; or
– extremely low temperature.
0102V520RDS01-09_EN 1/31/1, 4:20 PM7
8
Display
ENHANCED
PS PTY RT CT
MEMORY SLEEP
PCM
DSP
DIGITAL
PRO LOGIC
A
SP
B
VIRTUAL
DOLBY DTS
DIGITAL
PRO LOGIC
DISCO 5CH STEREO
MONO TV SPORTS
MOVIE THEATER 1 2
ENTERTAINMENT
GAME
CONCERT HALL
JAZZ CLUB PTY HOLD
NEWSINFOROCK CONCERT
BASS EXT.
AUTO
EON
STEREO
AFFAIRS SPORT
TUNED
dB
ms
KZ
H
1
2
3
4
5
6 7
8
9
0
q
w
r
e
t
u
y
1 t indicator
The “t” indicator lights up when the built-in DTS
decoder is turned on.
2 VIRTUAL indicator
This lights up when using Virtual CINEMA DSP.
3 g and o indicators
“ g ” lights up when the built-in Dolby Digital
decoder is on and the signals of the selected source are
encoded with Dolby Digital. “ o ” lights up when
the built-in Dolby Pro Logic decoder is on.
4 DSP program indicators
This indicates the name of the selected DSP program.
5 PTY HOLD indicator
This lights up while searching for stations in the PTY SEEK
mode.
6 RDS mode indicators
The name(s) of the RDS data offered by the currently
received RDS station light(s) up. Illumination of the red
indicator next to the RDS data name shows that the
corresponding RDS mode is now selected.
7 EON indicator
This lights up when an RDS station that offers the EON data
service is being received.
8 AUTO indicator
This lights up when the unit is in the automatic tuning
mode.
9 STEREO indicator
This lights up when an FM stereo broadcast with sufficient
signal strength is being received.
0 x indicator
“ x ” lights up when the built-in digital sound
field processor is on.
q v indicator
This lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (pulse
code modulation) digital audio signals.
w Headphones indicator
This lights up when headphones are connected.
e Multi-information display
This display shows various information: for example the
name of the selected input source and the various settings
during adjustment with the SET MENU. The current station
frequency and band (FM or AM) also appear when the tuner
is selected as the input source.
r MEMORY indicator
This flashes for about 5 seconds after pressing MEMORY.
During this period, the displayed station can be stored in the
memory.
t Program type name indicators
The name of the selected program type lights up when the
“EON” indicator lights up.
y TUNED indicator
This lights up when this unit tunes in to a station.
u SLEEP indicator
This lights up while the built-in SLEEP timer is on.
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
0102V520RDS01-09_EN 2/2/1, 5:34 PM8
9
English
BASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERA
TION
APPENDIX
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
Rear Panel
1 DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks
2 DIGITAL INPUT jacks
3 6CH INPUT jacks
See pages 12 and 13 for connection information.
4 Antenna input terminals
See page 26 for connection information.
5 Video component jacks
See pages 14 and 15 for connection information.
6 Speaker terminals
See pages 16 and 17 for connection information.
7 AC power cord
Connect to a power outlet.
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
As this terminal is used
for an examination in the
factory, do not connect
any equipment to this
terminal.
1
2
3 4
5
6
7
8
0 q
9
SWITCHED
100W MAX. TOTAL
AC OUTLETS
IMPEDANCE SELECTOR
SET BEFORE POWER ON
MAIN A OR B: 4
MIN. /SPEAKER
A
+
B: 8
MIN. /SPEAKER
CENTER
: 6
MIN. /SPEAKER
REAR
: 6
MIN. /SPEAKER
SPEAKERS
MAIN
+ –
R L
A
– +
B
CENTER REAR
(SURROUND)
R
L
+
–
S VIDEO
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
DVD
DVD
DVD
D-TV/CBL
D-TV/CBL
D-TV/CBL
IN
VCR 1
OUT
VIDEO SIGNAL
AUDIO SIGNAL
SUB
WOOFER
OUTPUT
IN
VCR 1
OUT
OUT(REC)
IN(PLAY)
CD
AUX
MD/CD-R
MD/CD-R
MD/CD-R
R
L
DIGITAL
OUTPUT
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
AM ANT GND
FM ANT
75
UNBAL.
TUNER
MAIN
CENTER
SUB WOOFER
SURROUND
DIGITAL
INPUT
6CH INPUT
CD
MAIN A OR B: 8
MIN. /SPEAKER
A
+
B:
16
MIN. /SPEAKER
CENTER
: 8
MIN. /SPEAKER
REAR
: 8
MIN. /SPEAKER
R
L
R
L
MAINS
8 AC OUTLET(S)
Use these outlets to supply power to your other audio/video
components (see page 18).
9 Audio component jacks
See pages 12 and 13 for connection information.
0 SUBWOOFER jack
See page 17 for connection information.
q IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch
Use this switch to match the amplifier output to your
speaker impedance. Set this unit in the standby mode before
you change the setting of this switch (see page 18).
(Europe model)
0102V520RDS01-09_EN 1/31/1, 4:21 PM9
10
SPEAKER SETUP
Speakers to Be Used
This unit is designed to provide the best sound-field quality
with a 5-speaker system, using main speakers, rear speakers
and a center speaker. If you use different brands of speakers
(with different tonal qualities) in your system, the tone of a
moving human voice and other types of sound may not shift
smoothly. We recommend that you use speakers from the
same manufacture to ensure even tonal quality.
The main speakers are used for the main source sound plus
the effect sounds. They will probably be the speakers from
your present stereo system. The rear speakers are used for
the effect and surround sounds, and the center speaker is for
the center sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it
is not practical to use a center speaker, you can do without
it. Best results, however, are obtained with the full system.
The main speakers should be high-performance models and
have enough power-handling capacity to accept the
maximum output of your audio system. The other speakers
do not have to be equal to the main speakers. For precise
sound localization, however, it is ideal to use high-
performance models that can reproduce sounds over the full
range for the center speaker and the rear speakers.
■ Use of a subwoofer expands your
sound field
It is also possible to further expand your system with the
addition of a subwoofer. The use of a subwoofer is effective
not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all
channels, but also for reproducing the LFE (low frequency
effect) channel with high fidelity when playing back a
source encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS. The YAMAHA
Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System is ideal for
natural and lively bass reproduction.
Speaker Placement
Refer to the following diagram when you place the
speakers.
Main speaker (R)
Center speaker
Main
speaker (L)
Subwoofer
Rear speaker (L)
Rear speaker (R)
1.8 m
■ Main speakers
Place the right and left main speakers an equal distance
from the ideal listening position. The distance of each
speaker from each side of the TV monitor should be the
same.
■ Rear speakers
Place these speakers behind your listening position, facing
slightly inwards, nearly 1.8 m (approx. 6 feet) above the
floor.
■ Center speaker
Align the front face of the center speaker with the front face
of your TV monitor. Place the speaker as close to the
monitor as possible, such as directly over or under the
monitor and centrally between the main speakers.
Note
• If the center speaker is not used, the sound will be heard from the
right and left main speakers. In that case, “CENTER SP” in the
SET MENU is set to the NON position.
■ Subwoofer
The position of the subwoofer is not so critical, because low
bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better to
place the subwoofer near the main speakers. Turn it slightly
toward the center of the room to reduce the wall reflections.
CAUTION
Please use magnetically shielded speakers.
Sometimes a video monitor may be adversely affected
even when magnetically shielded speakers are used.
Separate the speakers from the monitor if this happens.
PREPARATION
0103V520RDS10-20_EN 1/31/1, 4:21 PM10
11
English
BASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERA
TION
APPENDIX
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
CONNECTIONS
Before Connecting Components
CAUTION
Never connect this unit and other components to mains power until all connections between components have been
completed.
Be sure all connections are made correctly, that is to say L (left) to L, R (right) to R, “+” to “+” and “–” to “–”. Some
components require different connection methods and have different terminal names. Refer to the instructions for each
component to be connected to this unit.
When you connect other YAMAHA audio components (such as a tape deck, MD recorder and CD player or changer), connect
it to the jacks with the same number labels as !, #, $ etc.
Use RCA-type pin plug cables for connecting audio/video components with the exception described later.
The input and output jacks for pin plugs can be distinguished as follows:
Yellow video signals (composite)
White analog audio signals for the left channel
Red analog audio signals for the right channel
coaxial digital signals
After completing all connections, check them again to make sure they are correct.
V V
C C
L
R
L
R
0103V520RDS10-20_EN 1/31/1, 4:21 PM11
12
■ Connecting an MD recorder, CD
recorder or tape deck
y
• When you connect your recording component to both the analog
and digital input and output jacks, the priority is given to the
digital signal.
Notes
• When you connect a recording component to this unit, keep its
power on while using this unit. If the power is off, this unit may
distort the sound from other components.
• Since digital output and analog output (REC OUT) are
independent of each other, the analog signal is output only to the
analog jack, while the digital signal is output only to the digital
jack.
Connecting an External Decoder
This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (left and
right MAIN, CENTER, left and right SURROUND and
SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from an
external decoder, sound processor or pre-amplifier.
Connect the output jacks on your external decoder to the
6CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to match the left and right
outputs to the left and right input jacks for the main and
surround channels.
Notes
• When you select 6CH INPUT as the input source, this unit
automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and you
cannot listen to DSP programs.
• When you select 6CH INPUT as the input source, changing items
of “1 SPEAKER SET” in the SET MENU is not affected (except
“MAIN LVL”).
CONNECTIONS
Connecting Audio Components
■ Connecting to digital jacks
This unit has digital jacks for direct transmission of digital
signals through either coaxial or fiber optic cables. You can
use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS
bitstreams. When you connect components to both the
COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the
input signals from the COAXIAL jack. All digital input
jacks are acceptable for 96-kHz sampling digital signals.
y
• You can designate the input for each digital jack according to
your component by using “3 I/O ASSIGN” in the SET MENU.
About the dust protection cap
Pull out the cap from the optical jack before
you connect the fiber optic cable. Do not
discard the cap. When you are not using the
optical jack, be sure to put the cap back in
place. This cap protects the jack from dust.
Note
• The OPTICAL jacks on this unit conform to the EIA standard. If
you use a fiber optic cable that does not conform to this standard,
this unit may not function properly.
■ Connecting a CD player
y
• The COAXIAL jack is available for a CD player which has
coaxial digital output jack.
• When you connect a CD player to both the analog and digital
jacks, priority is given to the input signals from the digital jack.
0103V520RDS10-20_EN 1/31/1, 4:21 PM12
13
English
BASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERA
TION
APPENDIX
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
S VIDEO
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
DVD
DVD
DVD
D-TV/CBL
D-TV/CBL
D-TV/CBL
IN
VCR 1
OUT
VIDEO SIGNAL
AUDIO SIGNAL
IN
VCR 1
OUT
OUT(REC)
IN(PLAY)
CD
AUX
MD/CD-R
MD/CD-R
MD/CD-R
R
L
DIGITAL
OUTPUT
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
AM ANT GND
FM ANT
75
UNBAL.
TUNER
MAIN
CENTER
SUB WOOFER
SURROUND
DIGITAL
INPUT
6CH INPUT
CD
R
L
R
L
L
R
L R
L R
L
R
C
L
R
OO
OUTPUT
COAXIAL
OUTPUT
SUBWOOFER
OUTPUT
CENTER
OUTPUT
MAIN
OUTPUT
SURROUND
OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUTOUTPUT
OPTICAL
OUTPUT
OPTICAL
INPUT
L R
L
R
C
O
MD recorder or
CD recorder
CD player
External decoder
(Europe model)
indicates signal direction
indicates left analog cables
indicates right analog cables
indicates optical cables
indicates coaxial cables
CONNECTIONS
Audio component
0103V520RDS10-20_EN 1/31/1, 4:21 PM13
14
Connecting Video Components
■ Audio signal jacks
Be sure to connect the right channel (R), left channel (L), input (IN) and output (OUT) properly.
■ Video signal jacks
Be sure to connect the input (IN) and output (OUT) properly.
■ TV monitor with a 21-pin connector
Make a connection as shown on page 15 with a commercially available SCART-plug connector cable.
■ S VIDEO jacks
If your video component has “S” (high-resolution) video
jacks, they can be connected to this unit’s S VIDEO jacks.
Otherwise, connect the composite video jacks of your video
component to this unit’s composite video jacks.
Notes
• Use a special S VIDEO cable (commercially available) for the S
VIDEO connection.
• If video signals are input from both the S VIDEO input and
composite input jacks, the signals will be directed to their
respective output jacks.
AUDIO OUT R
AUDIO OUT L
VIDEO OUT
OPTICAL OUT
S VIDEO OUT
O
V
L
R
S
VIDEO AUX
S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL
S VIDEO
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
DVD D-TV/CBL
IN
VCR 1
OUT
VIDEO SIGNAL
S VIDEO OUT
S VIDEO
OUT
S VIDEO IN
S VIDEO IN
S
S
S
S
S
S VIDEO OUT
S
DVD player
Video monitor
S Video signal
Signal flow
TV/digital TV,
cable TV or
satellite tuner
VCR
Game console
CONNECTIONS
■ VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel)
These jacks are used to connect any video input source such
as a game console to this unit.
0103V520RDS10-20_EN 2/1/1, 2:23 PM14
15
English
BASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERA
TION
APPENDIX
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
S VIDEO
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
DVD
DVD
DVD
D-TV/CBL
D-TV/CBL
D-TV/CBL
IN
VCR 1
OUT
VIDEO SIGNAL
AUDIO SIGNAL
SUB
WOOFER
OUTPUT
IN
VCR 1
OUT
OUT(REC)
IN(PLAY)
CD
AUX
MD/CD-R
MD/CD-R
MD/CD-R
R
L
DIGITAL
OUTPUT
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
AM ANT GND
FM ANT
75
UNBAL.
TUNER
MAIN
CENTER
SUB WOOFER
SURROUND
DIGITAL
INPUT
6CH INPUT
CD
R
L
R
L
V
V
S VIDEO
INPUT
S
S VIDEO
OUTPUT
L
R
S
L
R
L
R
OPTICAL
OUTPUT
VIDEO
OUTPUT
AUDIO OUTPUTAUDIO OUTPUT VIDEO INPUT
VIDEO
OUTPUT
AUDIO
INPUT
V
S
O
O
OPTICAL
OUTPUT
L
R
S VIDEO
OUTPUT
AUDIO
OUTPUT
VIDEO
OUTPUT
V
S
S
V
V
R
L
S VIDEO
INPUT
VIDEO
INPUT
S VIDEO
OUTPUT
L
S
R
V
O
DVD player
Video monitor
SCART-plug
No connection
TV/digital TV
or cable
TV/satellite tuner
VCR
indicates signal direction
indicates left analog cables
indicates right analog cables
indicates optical cables
indicates video cables
indicates S-video cables
When using an LD player
Connect the LD player output to the DVD jack.
If the LD player has an OPTICAL digital output jack, connect it to this unit’s OPTICAL DVD jack. If it has analog jacks,
connect it to the analog DVD jacks. If it has an “RF OUTPUT jack” to output a Dolby Digital RF signal (AC-3), use a
commercially available RF demoduclator and connect it to the OPTICAL DVD jack.
If connecting a DVD player and an LD player, connect the LD player to the digital input jack (ex. D-TV/CBL) or the analog
input jack (D-TV/CBL or VCR 1). For details on connections and operations, refer to the operation instructions for the LD
player.
Note that this unit’s remote control can be used to operate the LD player by setting the corresponding manufacturer code for
the DVD/LD mode.
CONNECTIONS
(Europe model)
0103V520RDS10-20_EN 1/31/1, 4:21 PM15
16
Connecting Speakers
Be sure to connect the right channel (R), left channel (L), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are faulty, no
sound will be heard from the speakers, and if the polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound will be unnatural
and lack bass.
CAUTION
• Use speakers with the specified impedance shown on the rear panel of this unit.
• Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other and do not let them touch any metal part of this unit. This could
damage the unit and/or speakers.
■ Speaker cables
1 Remove approx. 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation
from each of the speaker cables.
2 Twist the exposed wires of the cable together
to prevent short circuits.
■ Connecting to the MAIN SPEAKERS terminals
1 Unscrew the knob.
2 Insert one bare wire into the hole in the side of
each terminal.
3 Tighten the knob to secure the wire.
■ Connecting to the REAR and CENTER SPEAKERS terminals
1 Open the tab.
2 Insert one bare wire into the hole of each
terminal.
3 Return the tab to secure the wire.
12
10 mm (3/8”)
2
1
3
Red: positive (+)
Black: negative (–)
Red: positive (+)
Black: negative (–)
■ Main speaker terminals
One or two speaker systems can be connected to these terminals. If you use only one speaker system, connect it to either of
the SPEAKERS A or B terminals.
■ Rear speaker terminals
A rear speaker system can be connected to these terminals.
■ Center speaker terminals
A center speaker can be connected to these terminals.
CONNECTIONS
2
1
3
0103V520RDS10-20_EN 1/31/1, 4:21 PM16
17
English
BASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERA
TION
APPENDIX
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
■ Subwoofer connection
When using a subwoofer with built-in amplifier, including
the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System,
connect the input jack of the subwoofer system to this jack.
Low bass signals distributed from the main, center and/or
rear channels are directed to this jack. (The cut-off
frequency of this jack is 90 Hz.) The LFE (low-frequency
effect) signals generated when Dolby Digital or DTS is
decoded are also directed if they are assigned to this jack.
Notes
• Adjust the subwoofer volume according to the operation
instructions for the subwoofer. (Fine adjustment is possible using
this unit’s output level control of the effect speakers.)
• Depending on the settings of “1 SPEAKER SET”, “LFE LEVEL
(5 DOLBY D. SET)” and “6 DTS SET” in the SET MENU, some
signals may not be output from the SUBWOOFER jack.
SWITCHED
100W MAX. TOTAL
AC OUTLETS
IMPEDANCE SELECTOR
SET BEFORE POWER ON
MAIN A OR B: 4
MIN. /SPEAKER
A
+
B: 8
MIN. /SPEAKER
CENTER
: 6
MIN. /SPEAKER
REAR
: 6
MIN. /SPEAKER
SPEAKERS
MAIN
+
–
R L
A
–
+
B
CENTER REAR
(SURROUND)
R
L
+
–
SUB
WOOFER
OUTPUT
MAIN A OR B: 8
MIN. /SPEAKER
A
+
B:
16
MIN. /SPEAKER
CENTER
: 8
MIN. /SPEAKER
REAR
: 8
MIN. /SPEAKER
MAINS
Main speakers A
Right
Left
Main speakers B
Right Left
(Europe model)
Center speaker Rear speakers
Right Left
Subwoofer
system
CONNECTIONS
0103V520RDS10-20_EN 1/31/1, 4:21 PM17
18
IMPEDANCE SELECTOR Switch
WARNING
Do not change the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch setting while the power to this unit is on, otherwise the unit may be
damaged.
If this unit fails to turn on when STANDBY/ON (or POWER) is pressed, the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch may not
be fully slid either position. If so, slide the switch to either position fully when this unit is in the standby mode.
Select the right or left position according to the impedance of speakers in your system. Be sure to move this switch only
when this unit is in the standby mode.
SWITCHED
100W MAX. TOTAL
AC OUTLETS
IMPEDANCE SELECTOR
SET BEFORE POWER ON
MAIN A OR B: 4
MIN. /SPEAKER
A
+
B: 8
MIN. /SPEAKER
CENTER
: 6
MIN. /SPEAKER
REAR
: 6
MIN. /SPEAKER
MAIN A OR B: 8
MIN. /SPEAKER
A
+
B:
16
MIN. /SPEAKER
CENTER
: 8
MIN. /SPEAKER
REAR
: 8
MIN. /SPEAKER
MAINS
SWITCHED
100W MAX. TOTAL
AC OUTLETS
IMPEDANCE SELECTOR
SET BEFORE POWER ON
MAIN A OR B: 4
MIN. /SPEAKER
A
+
B: 8
MIN. /SPEAKER
CENTER
: 6
MIN. /SPEAKER
REAR
: 6
MIN. /SPEAKER
MAIN A OR B: 8
MIN. /SPEAKER
A
+
B:
16
MIN. /SPEAKER
CENTER
: 8
MIN. /SPEAKER
REAR
: 8
MIN. /SPEAKER
MAINS
Switch
position
Speaker
Impedance level
Left
Main
If you use one set of main speakers, the impedance of
each speaker must be 4 Ω or higher.
If you use two sets of main speakers, the impedance of
each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher.
Center The impedance must be 6 Ω or higher.
Rear The impedance of each speaker must be 6 Ω or higher.
Right
Main
If you use one set of main speakers, the impedance of
each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher.
If you use two sets of main speakers, the impedance of
each speaker must be 16 Ω or higher.
Center The impedance must be 8 Ω or higher.
Rear The impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher.
Connecting the Power Supply Cords
After completing all connections, connect the AC power cord to an AC power outlet. Disconnect the AC power cord if you
will not use this unit for a long period of time.
■ AC OUTLETS (SWITCHED)
Europe model .................................................... 2 OUTLETS
U.K. model .......................................................... 1 OUTLET
Use these outlets to connect the power cords only from your
audio/video components to this unit. The power to the AC
OUTLET(S) is controlled by this unit’s STANDBY/ON (or
POWER). These outlets will supply power to any connected
component whenever this unit is turned on. The maximum
power (total power consumption of components) that can be
connected to the AC OUTLET(S) is 100 W.
(Europe model)
IMPEDANCE
SELECTOR
(Europe model)
To AC outlet
SWITCHED
CONNECTIONS
0103V520RDS10-20_EN 1/31/1, 4:21 PM18
19
English
BASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERA
TION
APPENDIX
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
ADJUSTING THE SPEAKER BALANCE
Using the Test Tone
The adjustment of each speaker sound output level should
be performed at your listening position with the remote
control.
1 Press AMP(TUNER) on the
component selector.
2 Press TEST.
“TEST LEFT” appears on the display.
3 Turn up the volume.
You will hear a test tone (like pink noise) from each
speaker for about two seconds in following order: left
main speaker, center speaker, right main speaker, right
rear speaker and left rear speaker. The display changes
as shown below.
Notes
• If the test tone cannot be heard, turn down the volume, set the unit
in the standby mode and check the speaker connections.
• If the test tone cannot be heard from the center speaker, check the
setting of “CENTER SP” in the SET MENU.
This procedure lets you adjust the sound output level
balance between the main, center and rear speakers by using
the built-in test tone generator. When this adjustment is
performed, the sound output level heard at the listening
position will be the same from each speaker. This is
important for the best performance of the digital sound field
processor, the Dolby Pro Logic decoder, Dolby Digital
decoder and DTS decoder.
Note
• Since this unit cannot enter the test mode while headphones are
connected to this unit, be sure to unplug the headphones from the
PHONES jack when using the test tone.
Before You Start Adjusting
1 Set the volume at the
minimum level.
2 Turn the power on.
3 Press SPEAKERS A or B
to select the main
speakers to be used.
If you use two main speaker
systems, press both A and B.
4 Set BASS, TREBLE and BALANCE to the
center position.
SILENT VIDEO AUX
PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL
6CH INPUTINPUT MODE
INPUT
VOLUME
RDS MODE/FREQ
EON
PTY SEEK
MODE START
TUNING
MODE
PRESET
/TUNING
FM/AM
MEMORY
EDIT
BASS BALANCE SPEAKERS
PROGRAM
PRESET/TUNINGEFFECT A/B/C/D/E
AB
OFF
ON
DIGITAL
–
+
LR
TREBLE
–
+
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO
SURROUND
DIGITAL
STANDBY
/ON
12
4
3
VOLUME
STANDBY
/ON
SPEAKERS
AB
OFF
ON
BASS BALANCE
– +
LR
TREBLE
– +
1
2,6
5
3
TEST
LEFT
TEST
RIGHT
TEST L SUR. TEST R SUR.
TEST CENTER
0103V520RDS10-20_EN 1/31/1, 4:21 PM19
20
4 Adjust BALANCE on the
front panel so that the
sound output level of the
right main speaker and the
left main speaker is the
same.
5 Press –/+ repeatedly to
adjust the output level of
the speaker currently
outputting the test tone so
that it becomes almost the
same as that of the main
speakers.
While adjusting, the test tone is heard from the selected
speaker.
6 When the adjustment is complete, press TEST.
The test tone stops.
Notes
• If “CENTER SP” in the SET MENU is set to the NON position,
the sound output level of the center speaker cannot be adjusted in
step 5. The center channel sound is automatically output from the
right and left main speakers.
• For details on adjusting the subwoofer speaker, refer to “DELAY
TIME AND SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS” on page 40.
• After adjusting with the test tone, it is possible to adjust the
speaker level to taste while listening to the playback of an actual
source. Refer to “DELAY TIME AND SPEAKER OUTPUT
LEVELS” on page 40.
y
• Once you have completed the adjustments, you can only adjust
the overall volume level of your audio system by using VOLUME
(or VOLUME (u/d)).
• If there is insufficient sound output from the center and rear
speakers, you may decrease the main speaker output level by
setting “MAIN LVL” in the SET MENU to “–10 dB”.
Front panel
BALANCE
LR
ADJUSTING THE SPEAKER BALANCE
0103V520RDS10-20_EN 1/31/1, 4:21 PM20
21
English
BASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERA
TION
APPENDIX
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
When using the remote control, press AMP(TUNER) on
the component selector.
1 Set the volume at the
minimum level.
2 Turn the power on.
3 Press SPEAKERS A or B
to select the main
speakers to be used.
If you use two main speaker
systems, press both A and B.
PLAYING A SOURCE
SILENT VIDEO AUX
PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL
6CH INPUTINPUT MODE
INPUT
VOLUME
RDS MODE/FREQ
EON
PTY SEEK
MODE START
TUNING
MODE
PRESET
/TUNING
FM/AM
MEMORY
EDIT
BASS BALANCE SPEAKERS
PROGRAM
PRESET/TUNINGEFFECT A/B/C/D/E
AB
OFFON
STANDBY
/ON
DIGITAL
– +
LR
TREBLE
– +
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO
SURROUND
DIGITAL
1,6
2
6
3
4
7
2
7
6
4
4 Select the desired input source with INPUT
l / h (or the input selector buttons). (Turn on
the video monitor for video sources.)
The name of the selected input source appears on the
display.
To select a source connected to the 6CH INPUT
jacks
Press 6CH INPUT so that “6CH INPUT” appears on the
display.
Notes
• An audio source can not be played if “6CH INPUT” appears.
Press 6CH INPUT to turn off “6CH INPUT”.
• If you select and play a video source when “6CH INPUT”
appears, the playback result will be a video image from the video
source and the sound from the audio source selected by using
“6CH INPUT”.
y
• The current input mode is also shown. Refer to “Input Modes and
Indications” on page 23 for details.
SPEAKERS
AB
OFF
ON
Front panel
VOLUME
Front panel
Remote control
6CH INPUT
Front panel
Input source
BASIC OPERATION
STANDBY
/ON
Front panel Remote control
or
or
or
Remote control
INPUT
Front panel
0104V520RDS21-25_EN 1/31/1, 4:22 PM21
22
5 Play the source.
Refer to the instructions for the source component (and
“TUNING” for details).
Note
• When controlling an audio/video component (MD recorder, CD
player, DVD player, tape deck, etc.) with the remote control, press
one of the component selector buttons, (TAPE/MD, CD, DVD/
LD, etc.), which corresponds to the component you want to
control. Refer to “PRESET REMOTE CONTROL”.
6 Adjust the volume to the desired output level.
If desired, adjust BASS, TREBLE, BALANCE, etc.
These controls are only effective for the sound from the
main speakers.
• BASS controls the low-frequency response.
• TREBLE controls the high-frequency response.
• BALANCE adjusts the balance of the output volume
from the right and left main speakers.
7 Use the digital sound field processor.
Refer to “Selecting a DSP Program”.
■ To mute the sound
Use this when you want to temporarily mute audio output.
Press MUTE on the remote
control.
To restore the audio output to
the previous volume level, press
MUTE again.
Note
• During muting, “MUTE ON” appears on the display.
■ When you have finished using this
unit
Press STANDBY/ON (or POWER) to set this
unit in the standby mode.
PLAYING A SOURCE
■ Notes on the digital signal
The digital input jacks of this unit can also handle
96-kHz sampling digital signals. (To utilize this, use a
source that supports 96-kHz sampling digital signals and set
the player for digital output. Refer to the operation
instructions for the player.) Note the following when a
96-kHz sampling digital signal is input to this unit:
1. The following indication will appear on the display.
2. DSP programs cannot be selected. Sound will be output
as normal 2-channel stereo sound from only the left and
right main speakers.
Note
• If “MAIN SP” in the SET MENU is set to SMALL and
“BASS OUT” is set to SWFR or “BASS OUT” is set to
BOTH, the sound is also output from the subwoofer.
3. Adjustment of the speaker output level described on
page 40 cannot be made (except the level of the
subwoofer).
■ BGV (background video) function
The BGV function allows you to combine a video image
from a video source with a sound from an audio source.
(For example, you can listen to classical music while you
are watching a video.) This function can only be controlled
with the remote control.
Play a video source, and then select an audio source with
the input selector buttons on the remote control. The BGV
function does not work if you select the audio source with
INPUT l / h on the front panel.
PROGRAM
Front panel
Remote control
or
VOLUME
Front panel Remote control
or
BASS BALANCE
–
+
LR
TREBLE
–
+
Front panel
PCM
KZ
H
0104V520RDS21-25_EN 1/31/1, 4:22 PM22
23
English
BASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERA
TION
APPENDIX
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
■ Notes on playing a source
encoded with a DTS signal
• If the digital output data of the player has been processed
in any way, you may not be able to perform DTS
decoding even if you make a digital connection between
this unit and the player.
• If you play a source encoded with a DTS signal and set
the input mode to ANALOG, this unit reproduces the
noise of an unprocessed DTS signal. When you want to
play a DTS source, be sure to connect the source to a
digital input jack and set the input mode to AUTO or
DTS.
• If you switch the input mode to ANALOG while playing
a source encoded with a DTS signal, this unit reproduces
no sound.
• The following phenomena may occur if the input mode
is set to AUTO when playing back a source encoded with
DTS:
– If you continue to play a source encoded with a DTS
signal, this unit automatically switches to the “DTS-
decoding” mode to prevent noise from being generated
during subsequent operation. (The “t” indicator
lights up on the display.) The “t” indicator may flash
immediately after playback of a source encoded with a
DTS signal has finished. Only a source encoded with a
DTS signal can be played back while this indicator is
flashing. (The indicator will flash for less than a minute.)
If you want to play a normal PCM source soon, set the
input mode back to AUTO.
– The “t” indicator may flash when a search or skip
operation is performed. If this status continues for a
certain length of time, the unit will automatically switch
from the “DTS-decoding” mode to PCM digital signal
input mode and the “t” indicator will go out.
Input Modes and Indications
When using the remote control, press AMP(TUNER) on
the component selector.
This unit comes with various input jacks. If your component
is connected to more than one type of input jack, you can set
the priority of the input signal.
Press INPUT MODE (or the input selector
button that you have pressed to select the
input source on the remote control) repeatedly
until the desired input mode is shown on the
display.
PLAYING A SOURCE
Front panel
or
Remote control
Input mode
AUTO: In this mode, the input signal is
automatically selected in the following
order:
1) Dolby Digital or DTS signal
2) Digital (PCM) signal
3) Analog signal
DTS: In this mode, only the digital input
signal encoded with DTS is selected
even if another signal is input at the
same time.
ANALOG (ANLG): In this mode, only the analog input
signal is selected even if a digital
signal is input at the same time.
Notes
• If digital signals are input from both the COAXIAL and
OPTICAL jacks, the digital signal from the COAXIAL jack is
selected.
• When AUTO is selected, this unit automatically determines the
type of signal. If this unit detects a Dolby Digital or DTS signal,
the decoder automatically switches to the appropriate setting and
reproduces 5.1 channel source.
• The sound output may be interrupted for some LD players and
DVD players in the following situation:
When the input mode has been set to AUTO and a search is
performed while playing the source encoded with a Dolby Digital
or DTS signal, the sound may delay for a moment when playback
is resumed.
• Depending on the LD player, playback may not be made when
playing an LD that is not digitally recorded with the input mode
set to AUTO. If this happens, set the input mode to ANALOG.
INPUT MODE
0104V520RDS21-25_EN 1/31/1, 4:22 PM23
24
Selecting a DSP Program
You can enhance your listening experience by selecting a
DSP program. Refer to “SOUND FIELD PROGRAM” for
details about each program.
y
• Make sure that the sound effect is turned on (see page 25).
■ On the remote control
1 Press AMP(TUNER) on the
component selector.
2 Press PRG+ or PRG–
repeatedly to select the
desired program.
The name of the selected
program appears for a moment
and the selected DSP program
indicator lights up on the
display.
1
2
PROGRAM
DSP
DIGITAL
MOVIE THEATER 1
BASS EXT.
PLAYING A SOURCE
DSP program name
■ On the front panel
Press PROGRAM l or h
repeatedly to select the
desired program.
The name of the selected
program appears for a moment
and the selected DSP program
indicator lights up on the
display.
SILENT VIDEO AUX
PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL
6CH INPUTINPUT MODE
INPUT
VOLUME
RDS MODE/FREQ
EON
PTY SEEK
MODE START
TUNING
MODE
PRESET
/TUNING
FM/AM
MEMORY
EDIT
BASS BALANCE SPEAKERS
PROGRAM
PRESET/TUNINGEFFECT A/B/C/D/E
AB
OFF
ON
STANDBY
/ON
DIGITAL
– +
LR
TREBLE
– +
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO
SURROUND
DIGITAL
PROGRAM /
DSP program name
y
• If desired, adjust the delay time and the sound output level of each
speaker. (Refer to “DELAY TIME AND SPEAKER OUTPUT
LEVELS” on page 40 for details.)
Notes
• Choose a DSP program based on your listening preference, and
not on the name of the program. The acoustics of your listening
room affect the DSP program. Minimize the sound reflections in
your room to maximize the effect created by the program.
• When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects
the last DSP program used with that source.
• When you set this unit in the standby mode, the current source
and DSP program are memorized and are automatically selected
when you turn on the power again.
• If a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is input when the input mode is
set to AUTO, the DSP program automatically switches to the
appropriate decoding program.
• When a monaural source is being played with PRO LOGIC/
NORMAL or PRO LOGIC/ENHANCED, no sound will be heard
from the main speakers and the rear speakers. Sound can only be
heard from the center speaker. However, if “CENTER SP” in the
SET MENU is set to NON, the center channel sound is output
from the main speakers.
• When a source connected to the 6CH INPUT jack of this unit is
selected, the digital sound field processor cannot be used.
• When 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit, the
DSP program cannot be selected. In this case, the sound is
reproduced as normal 2-channel stereo.
DSP
DIGITAL
MOVIE THEATER 1
BASS EXT.
0104V520RDS21-25_EN 1/31/1, 4:22 PM24
25
English
BASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERA
TION
APPENDIX
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
■ Virtual CINEMA DSP and SILENT
CINEMA
Virtual CINEMA DSP
Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the sound field
effects of the DSP program without rear speakers. Using
YAMAHA original technology, natural surround
reproduction is possible through the generation of a virtual
speaker.
The sound field processing is changed to the Virtual
CINEMA DSP mode by setting “REAR LR SP” on the SET
MENU to NON. Virtual CINEMA DSP is performed by
using the main speakers.
Note
• This unit is not set in the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode even if
“REAR LR SP” is set to NON in the following cases:
– when the 5CH STEREO, PRO LOGIC/NORMAL, DOLBY
DIGITAL/NORMAL or DTS/NORMAL program is selected;
– when the sound effect is turned off;
– when 6CH INPUT is selected as the input source;
– when 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit;
– when the Dolby Digital KARAOKE source is played;
– when using the test tone; or
– when connecting the headphones (you will hear SILENT
CINEMA).
SILENT CINEMA
SILENT CINEMA allows you to enjoy the realistic feel of
the DSP program while using headphones. This feature
delivers powerful surround reproduction just as if listening
through the speakers.
You can listen to SILENT CINEMA by connecting your
headphones to the PHONES jack while the effect speakers
are on.
EFFECT
Front panel
PLAYING A SOURCE
or
Canceling the Sound Effect (turning
off the effect speakers)
Press EFFECT to cancel the sound effect and
monitor only the main sound.
Press EFFECT again to turn the sound effect back on.
Notes
• If the sound effect is canceled when Dolby Digital or DTS is
decoding, the sounds of the center and rear channels are mixed
and output from the main speakers.
• If you turn off the sound effect when Dolby Digital or DTS is
decoding, it may happen that the sound is output faintly or not
output normally, depending on the source. In that case, turn back
on the sound effect.
Remote control
0104V520RDS21-25_EN 1/31/1, 4:22 PM25
26
TUNING
Connecting the Antennas
Both AM and FM indoor antennas are included with this unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient signal
strength.
Connect each antenna correctly to the designated terminals.
Indoor FM
antenna
(included)
AM ANT GND
FM ANT
75
UNBAL.
TUNER
5
4
Antenna stand
Connecting a coaxial cable to the included
75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter (U.K. model
only)
11 (7/16)
8 (5/16)
6 (1/14)
1
2
3
54
Cover
Unit: mm
(inch)
Lead wire
Clamp with
pliers.
Clamp
with
pliers.
Insert the wire
into the slot.
Open the cover of the
included 75-ohm/300-ohm
antenna adapter.
Cut the external sleeve of
the 75-ohm coaxial cable
and prepare it for
connection.
Cut the lead wire and
remove it.
Insert the cable wire into the
slot, and clamp it with
pliers.
Snap the cover into
place.
AM loop
antenna
(included)
Ground (GND terminal)
For maximum safety and
minimum interference, connect
the antenna GND terminal to a
good earth ground. A good earth
ground is a metal stake driven
into moist earth.
■ Connecting the indoor FM antenna
Connect the included indoor FM antenna to the FM ANT
75Ω UNBAL. terminal.
Note
• Do not connect an outdoor FM antenna and the indoor FM
antenna at the same time.
■ Connecting the AM loop antenna
1 Press and hold the tab to unlock the terminal
hole.
2 Insert the AM loop antenna lead wires into the
AM ANT and GND terminals.
3 Release the tab to lock the lead wires.
Lightly pull the lead wires to confirm a good
connection.
4 Attach the loop antenna to the antenna stand.
5 Orient the AM loop antenna so that the best
reception is obtained.
y
• The AM loop antenna can be removed from the stand and
attached to a wall, etc.
Notes
• The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit.
• The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an
outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit.
A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer
reception than an indoor one. If you experience poor
reception quality, an outdoor antenna may improve the
quality. Consult the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer
or service center about the outdoor antennas.
1
2
3
0105V520RDS26-30_EN 1/31/1, 4:22 PM26
27
English
BASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERA
TION
APPENDIX
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
TUNING
Automatic Tuning
Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are
strong and there is no interference.
1 Use INPUT l / h to select
TUNER as the input
source.
2 Press FM/AM to select the reception band (FM
or AM).
“FM” or “AM” appears on the display.
3 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) so
that the “AUTO” indicator lights up on the
display.
If “ z ” appears on the display next to the band
indication, press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn it
off.
SILENT VIDEO AUX
PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL
6CH INPUTINPUT MODE
INPUT
VOLUME
RDS MODE/FREQ
EON
PTY SEEK
MODE START
TUNING
MODE
PRESET
/TUNING
FM/AM
MEMORY
EDIT
BASS BALANCE SPEAKERS
PROGRAM
PRESET/TUNINGEFFECT A/B/C/D/E
AB
OFF
ON
STANDBY
/ON
DIGITAL
– +
LR
TREBLE
– +
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO
SURROUND
DIGITAL
3
2
1
4
INPUT
PRESET/TUNING
PRESET/TUNING
INPUT
TUNING
MODE
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
TUNING
MODE
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
PRESET
/TUNING
EDIT
PRESET
/TUNING
EDIT
FM/AM
FM/AM
4 Press PRESET/TUNING l once to tune in to a
lower frequency and h once to tune in to a
higher frequency.
Press the button again if the tuning search does not stop
at the desired station.
y
• Use the manual tuning method if the tuning search does not stop
at the desired station (because the signal from the station is weak).
• When tuned in to a station, the “TUNED” indicator lights up and
the frequency of the received station is shown on the display. If an
RDS station that offers the PS data service is being received, the
station name is shown instead of the frequency on the display.
Manual Tuning
If the signal from the station you want to select is weak, you
must tune in to it manually.
1 Use INPUT l / h to select
TUNER as input source.
2 Press FM/AM to select the reception band (FM
or AM).
“FM” or “AM” appears on the display.
3 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) so
that the “AUTO” indicator goes off.
If “ z ” appears on the display next to the band
indication, press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn it
off.
4 Press PRESET/TUNING l or h to tune in to
the desired station.
To continue the tuning search, hold down the button.
Note
• If you tune in manually to an FM station, it will be automatically
received in monaural mode to increase the signal quality.
or
Lights up
Turn “ z ” off
or
Goes off
Turn “ z ” off
0105V520RDS26-30_EN 1/31/1, 4:22 PM27
28
TUNING
Automatic Preset Tuning (for RDS
stations only)
You can make use of the automatic preset tuning function
for RDS stations only. This function enables the unit to
automatically tune in with strong signals and to sequentially
store up to 40 RDS stations (5 groups x 8 stations).
1 Press FM/AM to select the FM band.
2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) so
that the “AUTO” indicator lights up on the
display.
3 Hold down MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) for
about 3 seconds.
The preset number, the “MEMORY” and “AUTO”
indicators flash. After about 5 seconds, automatic
preset tuning begins from the frequency currently
displayed toward the higher frequencies.
Received stations are sequentially stored as A1, A2 ...
A8. If more than 8 stations have been tuned, they are
stored as preset station numbers in other groups (B, C,
D and E) in that order.
■ Automatic preset tuning options
You can select the preset number from which the unit will
store RDS stations and/or begin tuning toward lower
frequencies. Before automatic preset tuning begins (after
pressing MEMORY in step 3),
1. Press A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l or h to
select the preset number with which the first station will
be stored. The automatic preset tuning will stop when
stations have all been stored up to E8.
2. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn “ z ” off and
then press PRESET/TUNING l to begin tuning toward
lower frequencies.
■ When automatic preset tuning is
completed
The display shows the frequency of the last preset station.
Check the contents and the number of preset stations by
following the procedure in the section “To Recall a Preset
Station” on page 29.
Notes
• A new setting can be stored in place of the former one.
• The reception mode is stored along with the station frequency.
• You can manually replace a preset station with another FM or AM
station by simply using the manual preset tuning method.
• Automatic preset tuning will be performed for all RDS network
stations until all have been stored up to E8. Even if the number of
received stations is not enough to be stored up to E8, automatic
preset tuning is automatically ended after searching for all
stations.
• Only RDS stations with sufficient signal strength are stored by
automatic preset tuning. If the station you want to store is weak in
signal strength, tune in to it manually in monaural mode and store
it by using the manual preset tuning method. (There may be a
case that this unit cannot receive a station which could be
received by using the automatic tuning method. This is because
this unit receives a large amount of PI (Program Identification)
data along with the station.)
Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data
from being lost when this unit is set in the standby mode.
If, however, the power cord is disconnected from the AC
power outlet or the power is cut for more than one week,
the memory will be erased. If so, store the stations again
by using preset tuning methods.
Lights up
SILENT VIDEO AUX
PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL
6CH INPUTINPUT MODE
INPUT
VOLUME
RDS MODE/FREQ
EON
PTY SEEK
MODE START
TUNING
MODE
PRESET
/TUNING
FM/AM
MEMORY
EDIT
BASS BALANCE SPEAKERS
PROGRAM
PRESET/TUNINGEFFECT A/B/C/D/E
AB
OFF
ON
STANDBY
/ON
DIGITAL
– +
LR
TREBLE
– +
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO
SURROUND
DIGITAL
213
FM/AM
TUNING
MODE
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
BASS EXT.
AUTO
Flashes
0105V520RDS26-30_EN 1/31/1, 4:22 PM28
29
English
BASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERA
TION
APPENDIX
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
TUNING
Manual Preset Tuning
You can also store up to 40 stations (5 groups x 8 stations)
manually.
1 Tune in to the desired station.
Refer to “Automatic/Manual Tuning” for the tuning
procedure.
2 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM).
The “MEMORY” indicator flashes for about 5 seconds.
3 Press A/B/C/D/E repeatedly to select the
desired group (A to E) of preset stations
before the “MEMORY” indicator goes off.
Make sure that “ z ” appears on the display. The
selected group appears on the display.
4 Press PRESET/TUNING l or h to select a
preset station number (1 to 8) with which you
want to store the station before the “MEMORY”
indicator goes off.
Press l to select a lower preset
station number and h to select
a higher preset station number.
5 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) before the
“MEMORY” indicator goes off.
The displayed station has been stored as the preset
group and number you have selected, and the reception
band and frequency appear and the “TUNED” indicator
lights up on the display.
6 Repeat steps 1 to 5 to store other stations.
Notes
• A new setting can be stored in place of the former one.
• The reception mode is stored along with the station frequency.
To Recall a Preset Station
You can recall any desired station simply by selecting the
preset station number with which it was stored.
You can also recall a preset station with the remote control.
Press AMP(TUNER) on the component selector and press
TUNER on the input selector.
1 Press A/B/C/D/E to select the required group
of preset stations.
Make sure that “ z ” appears on the display.
2 Press PRESET/TUNING l or h (or PRESET
–/+) to select a preset station number (1 to 8).
The preset group and number appear on the display
along with the reception band, frequency, and the
“TUNED” indicator lights up.
PRESET/TUNING
SILENT VIDEO AUX
PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL
6CH INPUTINPUT MODE
INPUT
VOLUME
RDS MODE/FREQ
EON
PTY SEEK
MODE START
TUNING
MODE
PRESET
/TUNING
FM/AM
MEMORY
EDIT
BASS BALANCE SPEAKERS
PROGRAM
PRESET/TUNINGEFFECT A/B/C/D/E
AB
OFF
ON
STANDBY
/ON
DIGITAL
– +
LR
TREBLE
– +
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO
SURROUND
DIGITAL
1
2
1
2
AUTO
STEREO
TUNED
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
A/B/C/D/E
SILENT VIDEO AUX
PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL
6CH INPUTINPUT MODE
INPUT
VOLUME
RDS MODE/FREQ
EON
PTY SEEK
MODE START
TUNING
MODE
PRESET
/TUNING
FM/AM
MEMORY
EDIT
BASS BALANCE SPEAKERS
PROGRAM
PRESET/TUNINGEFFECT A/B/C/D/E
AB
OFF
ON
STANDBY
/ON
DIGITAL
– +
LR
TREBLE
– +
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO
SURROUND
DIGITAL
3
2,5
4
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
AUTO
STEREO
TUNED
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/TUNING
Flashes
Front panel
or
Remote control
Front panel
or
Remote control
0105V520RDS26-30_EN 1/31/1, 4:22 PM29
30
TUNING
Exchanging Preset Stations
You can exchange the assignment of two preset stations
with each other.
Example: Exchange preset station “E1” with “A5”
1 Recall preset station “E1”.
Refer to the procedure in the section “To Recall a
Preset Station” on page 29.
2 Hold down (PRESET/
TUNING) EDIT for about
3 second.
“E1” and the “MEMORY”
indicator flash.
3 Recall preset station “A5” by using the buttons
on the front panel.
“A5” and the “MEMORY” indicator flash.
4 Press (PRESET/TUNING)
EDIT again.
The display shows the
exchange of stations has been
completed.
SILENT VIDEO AUX
PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL
6CH INPUTINPUT MODE
INPUT
VOLUME
RDS MODE/FREQ
EON
PTY SEEK
MODE START
TUNING
MODE
PRESET
/TUNING
FM/AM
MEMORY
EDIT
BASS BALANCE SPEAKERS
PROGRAM
PRESET/TUNINGEFFECT A/B/C/D/E
AB
OFF
ON
STANDBY
/ON
DIGITAL
– +
LR
TREBLE
– +
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO
SURROUND
DIGITAL
2,4
PRESET
/TUNING
EDIT
PRESET
/TUNING
EDIT
MEMORY
BASS EXT.
MEMORY
BASS EXT.
MEMORY
Flashes
Flashes
0105V520RDS26-30_EN 1/31/1, 4:23 PM30
31
English
BASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERA
TION
APPENDIX
INTRODUCTION PREPARATION
RECEIVING RDS STATIONS
Radio Data System (RDS) is a data transmission system by
FM stations in many countries. Stations using this system
transmit an inaudible stream of data in addition to the
normal radio signal.
RDS data contains various information such as PI (Program
Identification), PS (Program Service name), PTY (Program
Type), RT (Radio Text), CT (Clock Time), EON (Enhanced
Other Networks), etc. The RDS function is carried out
among the network stations.
Description of RDS Data
This unit can receive PI, PS, PTY, RT, CT, and EON data
when receiving RDS broadcasting stations.
■ PS (Program Service name) mode:
The name of the RDS station being received is displayed.
■ PTY (Program Type) mode:
The program type on the RDS station being received is
displayed. There are 15 program types to classify RDS
stations. You can make this unit search for a station which is
broadcasting a program of the desired type. Refer to “PTY
SEEK Function” for details.
■ RT (Radio Text) mode:
Information about the program (such as the title of the song,
name of the singer, etc.) on the RDS station being received
is displayed by a maximum of 64 alphanumeric characters,
including the umlaut symbol. If other characters are used for
RT data, they are displayed with under-bars.
■ CT (Clock Time) mode:
The current time is displayed and updated every minute. If
the data are accidentally cut off, “CT WAIT” may appear.
■ EON (Enhanced Other Networks):
Refer to “EON Function” on page 33.
Changing the RDS Mode
The four modes are available in this unit for displaying RDS
data. When an RDS station is being received, PS, PTY, RT
and/or CT that correspond to the RDS data services offered
by the station light up on the display. Press RDS MODE/
FREQ repeatedly to change the display mode among the
RDS data offered by the transmitting station in the order
shown below. Illumination of the red indicator next to the
RDS mode indicator shows that the corresponding RDS
mode is now selected.
Notes
• When an RDS station is being received, do not press RDS
MODE/FREQ until one or more RDS mode indicators light up on
the display. If you press the button before the indicators light up
on the display, the mode cannot be changed. This is because the
unit has not yet received all of the RDS data on the station.
• RDS data not offered by the station cannot be selected.
• The RDS data service cannot be utilized by this unit if the
received signal is not strong enough. In particular, the RT mode
requires a large amount of data to be received, so it is possible
that the RT mode may not be displayed even if other RDS modes
(PS, PTY, etc.) are displayed.
• RDS data cannot sometimes be received under poor reception
conditions. If so, press TUNING MODE so that the “AUTO”
indicator goes off from the display. Although the reception mode
is changed to monaural by this operation, when you change the
display to RDS mode, RDS data may be displayed.
• If the signal strength is weakened by external interference during
the reception of an RDS station, the RDS data service may be cut
off suddenly and “...WAIT” will appear on the display.
RDS MODE/FREQ
PS mode
PTY mode
RT mode
CT mode
Frequency
display mode
0106V520RDS31-34_EN 1/31/1, 4:23 PM31
32
PTY SEEK Function
If you select the desired program type, the unit
automatically searches all preset RDS stations that are
broadcasting a program of the required type.
1 Press PTY SEEK MODE to set the unit in the
PTY SEEK mode.
The program type of the station being received or
“NEWS” flashes on the display.
2 Press PRESET/TUNING l or h to select the
desired program type.
The selected program type flashes on the display.
3 Press PTY SEEK START to begin searching all
preset RDS stations.
The selected program type flashes and the “PTY
HOLD” indicator lights up on the display while
searching for stations.
• If a station that is broadcasting a program of the
required type is found, the unit stops at that station.
• If the called station is not the desired one, press PTY
SEEK START again. The unit begins searching for
another station that is broadcasting a program of the
same type.
RECEIVING RDS STATIONS
■ To cancel this function
Press PTY SEEK MODE twice.
■ Program types in the PTY mode
There are 15 program types to classify RDS stations.
NEWS News
AFFAIRS Current affairs
INFO General information
SPORT Sports
EDUCATE Education
DRAMA Drama
CULTURE Culture
SCIENCE Science
VARIED Light entertainment
POP M Pops
ROCK M Rock
M.O.R. M Middle-of-the-road music (easy-listening)
LIGHT M Light classics
CLASSICS Serious classics
OTHER M Other music
PTY SEEK
MODE START
Flashes
PRESET/TUNING
The selected program type flashes.
Light up
PTY SEEK
MODE START
PS PTY RT CT
PTY HOLD
BASS EXT.
AUTO
SILENT VIDEO AUX
PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL
6CH INPUTINPUT MODE
INPUT
VOLUME
RDS MODE/FREQ
EON
PTY SEEK
MODE START
TUNING
MODE
PRESET
/TUNING
FM/AM
MEMORY
EDIT
BASS BALANCE SPEAKERS
PROGRAM
PRESET/TUNINGEFFECT A/B/C/D/E
AB
OFF
ON
STANDBY
/ON
DIGITAL
–
+
LR
TREBLE
–
+
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO
SURROUND
DIGITAL
31
2
Flashes
0106V520RDS31-34_EN 2/2/1, 5:35 PM32
33
English
BASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERA
TION
APPENDIX
INTRODUCTION PREPARATION
EON Function
This function uses the EON data service on the RDS station
network. If you simply select the desired program type
(NEWS, INFO, AFFAIRS or SPORT), the unit
automatically searches for all preset RDS stations that are
scheduled to broadcast a program of the required type and
switches from the station being currently received to the
new station when the broadcasts starts.
Note
• This function can only be used when an RDS station that offers
the EON data service is being received. When such a station is
being received, the “EON” indicator lights up on the display.
1 Make sure that the “EON” indicator lights up
on the display.
If the “EON” indicator does not light up, tune in to
another RDS station so that the “EON” indicator lights
up.
PS PTY RT CT
AB
BASS EXT.
AUTO
EON
STEREO
TUNED
SILENT VIDEO AUX
PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL
6CH INPUTINPUT MODE
INPUT
VOLUME
RDS MODE/FREQ
EON
PTY SEEK
MODE START
TUNING
MODE
PRESET
/TUNING
FM/AM
MEMORY
EDIT
BASS BALANCE SPEAKERS
PROGRAM
PRESET/TUNINGEFFECT A/B/C/D/E
AB
OFF
ON
STANDBY
/ON
DIGITAL
–
+
LR
TREBLE
–
+
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO
SURROUND
DIGITAL
2
2 Press EON repeatedly to select the desired
program type (NEWS, INFO, AFFAIRS or
SPORT).
The selected program type name indicator lights up on
the display.
• If a preset RDS station of the selected program type
starts broadcasting, the unit will automatically switch
from the program being currently received to that
program. The program type name indicator flashes.
• When broadcasting of the required program ends, the
previously received station (or another program on
the same station) is recalled.
■ To cancel this function
Press EON repeatedly until no program type name lights up
on the display.
RECEIVING RDS STATIONS
EON
PS PTY RT CT
AB
NEWS
BASS EXT.
AUTO
EON
STEREO
TUNED
Lights up
PS PTY RT CT
NEWS
BASS EXT.
AUTO
EON
STEREO
TUNED
Flashes
PS PTY RT CT
AB
BASS EXT.
AUTO
EON
STEREO
TUNED
Lights up
0106V520RDS31-34_EN 1/31/1, 4:23 PM33
34
RECORDING A SOURCE
SILENT VIDEO AUX
PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL
6CH INPUTINPUT MODE
INPUT
VOLUME
RDS MODE/FREQ
EON
PTY SEEK
MODE START
TUNING
MODE
PRESET
/TUNING
FM/AM
MEMORY
EDIT
BASS BALANCE SPEAKERS
PROGRAM
PRESET/TUNINGEFFECT A/B/C/D/E
AB
OFF
ON
STANDBY
/ON
DIGITAL
–
+
LR
TREBLE
–
+
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO
SURROUND
DIGITAL
2
1,4
Recording adjustments and other operations are performed
from the recording component. Refer to the instructions for
these components.
1 Set the volume at the
minimum level.
2 Select the source you want to record.
3 Begin recording by the recording component
connected to this unit.
4 Play the source and then turn up the volume to
confirm the input source.
Notes
• Do a test recording before you start an actual recording.
• When this unit is set in the standby mode, you cannot record
between other components connected to this unit.
• The DSP program and the setting of VOLUME, BASS, TREBLE
and BALANCE have no effect on the material being recorded.
• A source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks of this unit cannot
be recorded.
• Composite video and S video signals pass independently through
this unit’s video circuits. Therefore, when recording or dubbing
video signals, if your video source component is connected to
provide only an S video (or only a composite video) signal, you
can record only an S video (or only a composite video) signal by
your VCR.
• A given input source is not output on the same REC OUT
channel. (For example, the signal input from VCR 1 IN is not
output on VCR 1 OUT.)
• Check the copyright laws in your country to record from records,
CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe
copyright laws.
If you play back a video source that uses scrambled or
encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the
picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals.
■ Special considerations when
recording DTS software
The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to
digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise being
recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to record
sources that have DTS signals recorded on them, the
following considerations and adjustments need to be made.
For DVDs and CDs encoded with DTS
Only 2-channel analog audio signals may be recorded.
Set the DVD player (or CD player) as described in the
player’s operation instructions so that the audio signals are
output from the player’s analog outputs.
2
4
Remote control
INPUT
Front panel
or
VOLUME
Front panel
VOLUME
Front panel
or
Remote control
0106V520RDS31-34_EN 1/31/1, 4:23 PM34
35
English
BASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERA
TION
APPENDIX
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
SET MENU
The SET MENU consists of 9 items including the speaker
mode setting. Use the SET MENU to enjoy the optimum
audio/video playback for your system.
y
• You can adjust the items on the SET MENU while playing a
source.
1 SPEAKER SET
CENTER SP
MAIN SP
REAR LR SP
BASS OUT
MAIN LVL
2 HP TONE CTRL
3 I/O ASSIGN
4 INPUT MODE
5 DOLBY D. SET
LFE LEVEL
D-RANGE
6 DTS SET
7 SP DLY TIME
8 DISPLAY SET
9 MEM. GUARD
Adjusting the Items on the SET
MENU
Adjustment should be made with the remote control.
Note
• Some items require extra steps to change to the desired setting.
1
3,6
4,5
2
ADVANCED OPERATION
1 Press AMP(TUNER) on the
component selector.
2 Press SET MENU to enter the SET MENU.
3 Press PRG– (or PRG+) repeatedly to select the
item (1 to 9) you want to adjust.
y
• By pressing SET MENU repeatedly, you can select items in the
same order as when pressing PRG–.
4 Press – or + once to enter the setup mode of
the selected item.
The last setting you adjusted appears on the display.
Depending on the item, press PRG– (or PRG+) to
select a sub item.
5 Press – or + repeatedly to change the setting
of the item.
6 Press PRG– (or PRG+)
repeatedly until the input
source name appears to
exit from the SET MENU.
0107V520RDS35-42_EN 1/31/1, 4:23 PM35
36
■ MAIN SP (main speaker mode)
Choices: LARGE, SMALL
Initial setting: LARGE
LARGE
Select this if you have large main speakers. The entire range
of the left and right main channel signal is directed to the
left and right main speakers.
SMALL
Select this if you have small main speakers. The low-
frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the main channel
are directed to the speakers selected with “BASS OUT”.
Note
• When you select MAIN for “BASS OUT”, the low-frequency
signals (90 Hz and below) of the main channel are directed to the
main speakers even if you select SMALL for the main speaker
mode.
■ REAR LR SP (rear speaker mode)
Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NON (none)
Initial setting: LRG
LRG
Select this if you have large left and right rear speakers or if
a rear subwoofer is connected to the rear speakers. The
entire range of the rear channel signal is directed to the left
and right rear speakers.
SML
Select this if you have small left and right rear speakers. The
low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the rear
channel are directed to the speakers selected with “BASS
OUT”.
NON
Select this if you do not have rear speakers.
y
• This unit is set in the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode by selecting
NON for “REAR LR SP”.
SET MENU
Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data
from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby
mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC
outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to
power failure. However, if the power is cut for more than
one week, the settings of the SET MENU you adjusted
will return to the factory settings. If so, adjust the items
again.
1 SPEAKER SET (speaker mode
settings)
Use this feature to select suitable output modes for your
speaker configuration.
Notes
• When 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit, level
adjustments in items “MAIN SP”, “BASS OUT” and “MAIN
LVL ” are possible, but those in items “CENTER SP” and “REAR
LR SP” are not affected.
• When 6CH INPUT is selected as the input source, level
adjustments in items of “1 SPEAKER SET” are not affected
(except “MAIN LVL”).
■ CENTER SP (center speaker mode)
By adding a center speaker to your speaker configuration,
the unit can provide good dialog localization for many
listeners and superior synchronization of sound and images.
Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NON (none)
Initial setting: LRG
LRG
Select this if you have a large center speaker. The entire
range of the center channel signal is directed to the center
speaker.
SML
Select this if you have a small center speaker. The low-
frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the center channel
are directed to the speakers selected with “BASS OUT”.
NON
Select this if you do not have a center speaker. All of the
center channel signals are directed to the left and right main
speakers.
0107V520RDS35-42_EN 1/31/1, 4:23 PM36
37
English
BASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERA
TION
APPENDIX
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
■ BASS OUT (bass out mode)
LFE signals carry low-frequency effects when this unit
decodes a Dolby Digital or DTS signal. Low-frequency
signals are defined as 90 Hz and below.
Choices: SWFR (subwoofer), MAIN, BOTH
Initial setting: BOTH
SWFR
Select this if you use a subwoofer. The LFE signals are
directed to the subwoofer.
MAIN
Select this if you do not use a subwoofer. The LFE signals
are directed to the main speakers.
BOTH
Select this if you use a subwoofer and you want to mix the
main channel low-frequency signals with the LFE signals.
Notes
• When playing a 2-channel source (CD, MD, tape, video cassette
etc.), select BOTH position to direct low bass signals (below
90 Hz) to the SUBWOOFER jack.
• When you select SMALL (SML) for items “CENTER SP”,
“MAIN SP” and “REAR LR SP”, the low-frequency signals
(90 Hz and below) from those channels are added to the LFE and
output to the subwoofer.
■ MAIN LVL (main level mode)
Change this setting if you cannot match the output level of
the center and rear speakers with the main speakers because
of the unusually high-efficiency performance of the main
speakers.
Choices: NORM (normal), –10 dB
Initial setting: NORM
NORM (normal)
Normally select this setting.
–10 dB
Select this if you cannot match the output level of your
effect speakers with that of your main speakers when using
the test tone. This setting decreases the main speaker output
level to about one-third of the normal level.
2 HP TONE CTRL (headphone tone
control)
Use this feature to adjust the level of the bass and treble
when you use your headphones.
Control range (dB): –6 to +3
Initial setting: 0 dB for both BASS and TRBL (treble)
3 I/O ASSIGN
It is possible to assign jacks according to the component to
be used if this unit’s DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT jack
settings (component names for terminals) differ from that
component. This makes it possible to change the jack
assignment and effectively connect more component.
Once you assign, you can select that component with
INPUT l / h (or the input selector buttons).
■ 3A (1) (for the OPTICAL OUTPUT
jack)
Initial setting: (1) MD/CD-R
■ 3B (2) to (4) (for the OPTICAL
INPUT jacks)
Initial settings: (2) MD/CD-R
(3) DVD
(4) D-TV/CBL
SET MENU
dB
dB
0107V520RDS35-42_EN 1/31/1, 4:23 PM37
38
■ 3C (5) (for the COAXIAL INPUT
jack)
Initial setting: (5) CD
Note
• You cannot select an item more than once for the same type of
jack.
4 INPUT MODE (initial input mode)
Use this feature to designate the input mode when turning
on the power of this unit with the source component
connected to more than one type of input jacks.
Choices: AUTO, LAST
Initial setting: AUTO
AUTO
Select this to allow this unit to automatically detect the type
of input signal and select the appropriate input mode.
LAST
Select this to set this unit to automatically select the last
input mode used for that source.
5 DOLBY D. SET (Dolby Digital set)
This setting is effective only when this unit decodes Dolby
Digital signals.
■ LFE LEVEL
Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-
frequency effect) channel when playing back a Dolby
Digital signal. The LFE signal carries the low-frequency
special effect sound which is only added to certain scenes.
Control value (dB): –20 to 0
Initial setting: 0 dB
Notes
• Adjust the LFE level according to the capacity of your subwoofer.
• Normally, around –6 dB to –8 dB is most suitable for listening at
home.
■ D-RANGE (dynamic range)
Use this feature to adjust the dynamic range (the difference
between the maximum level and the minimum level of
sounds).
Choices: MAX, STD (standard), MIN
Initial setting: MAX
• Select MAX for feature films.
• Select STD for general use.
• Select MIN for listening to sources at an extremely low
volume level.
SET MENU
dB
Input level
Input level
L-LEVEL BST
H-LEVEL CUT
0.0
0.0
1.0
1.0
MAX
Dialog
level
Input level
Output level
STD
Dialog
level
Output level
MIN
Dialog
level
Output level
dB
Note
• When you select MIN, the sound output may be faint because
some Dolby Digital signals are not compatible with the
minimum-level dynamic range. In this case, select MAX or STD.
6 DTS SET (DTS LFE level)
This setting is effective only when this unit decodes DTS
signals.
Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-
frequency effect) channel when playing back a DTS signal.
The LFE signal carries the low-frequency special effect
sound which is only added to certain scenes.
Control range (dB): –10 to +10
Initial setting: 0 dB
Note
• Adjust the LFE level according to the capacity of your subwoofer.
0107V520RDS35-42_EN 1/31/1, 4:23 PM38
39
English
BASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERA
TION
APPENDIX
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
SET MENU
ms
7 SP DLY TIME (center delay)
Use this feature to adjust the delay of the center channel
sound. This feature works when this unit decodes a Dolby
Digital or DTS signal. Ideally, the center speaker should be
the same distance from the listening position as the left and
right main speakers. However, in most home situations, the
center speaker is placed in line with the main speakers. By
delaying the sound from the center speaker, the apparent
distance from the center speaker to the listening position can
be adjusted to make it seem the same as the distance
between the left and right main speakers to the listening
position. Adjusting the delay time for the center speaker is
especially important for giving depth to the dialog.
Control range (ms): 0 to 5
Initial setting: 0 ms
L
C
C
R
RL
RR
Center speaker image
y
• Increasing the delay by 1 ms simulates moving the speaker
about 30 cm (one foot) farther away from the actual position of
the center speaker.
8 DISPLAY SET
■ DIMMER
You can adjust the brightness of the display.
Control range : –4 to 0
Initial setting: 0
9 MEM. GUARD (memory guard)
Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to the setting
of the SET MENU and other settings on this unit.
Choices: ON, OFF
Initial setting: OFF
Select ON to protect the following features:
• All SET MENU items
• Center, rear speakers and subwoofer levels
• Delay time adjusted by using TIME/LEVEL
Notes
• When “9 MEM. GUARD” is set to ON, you cannot use the test
tone.
• When “9 MEM. GUARD” is set to ON, you cannot select any
other SET MENU items.
0107V520RDS35-42_EN 1/31/1, 4:23 PM39
40
DELAY TIME AND SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS
When using the digital sound field processor with the
Dolby Pro Logic decoder, Dolby Digital decoder or DTS
decoder, you can adjust the delay time between the main
sound and sound effect, and each speaker’s output level as
you wish.
Delay Time
You can adjust the time difference between the beginning
of the sound from the main speakers and the beginning of
the sound effect from the rear speakers. The larger the
value, the later the sound effect is generated. The delay
time can be individually adjusted to all DSP programs.
Notes
• Adding too much delay will cause an unnatural effect with some
sources.
• The sound is momentarily interrupted while adjusting the delay
time.
Program Preset value (ms)
1. CONCERT HALL 45
2. JAZZ CLUB 30
3. ROCK CONCERT 15
4. DISCO 26
5CH STEREO 2
GAME 36
5. TV SPORTS 10
6. MONO MOVIE 69
7. 70 mm SPECTACLE 23
DGTL SPECTACLE 13
DTS SPECTACLE 13
70 mm SCI-FI 20
DGTL SCI-FI 16
DTS SCI-FI 16
8. 70 mm ADVENTURE 20
DGTL ADVENTURE 15
DTS ADVENTURE 15
70 mm GENERAL 20
DGTL GENERAL 15
DTS GENERAL 15
9. PRO LOGIC/NORMAL 20
DOLBY DIGITAL/NORMAL 5
DTS DIGITAL SUR./NORMAL 5
PRO LOGIC/ENHANCED 20
DOLBY DIGITAL/ENHANCED 5
DTS DIGITAL SUR./ENHANCED 5
Sound Output Level of the Center,
Right Rear and Left Rear Speakers,
and Subwoofer
If desired, you can adjust the sound output level of each
speaker even if it has already been adjusted in
“ADJUSTING THE SPEAKER BALANCE” procedure.
Notes
• If “CENTER SP” in the SET MENU is set to the NON position,
the sound output level of the center speaker cannot be adjusted.
This is because the center channel sound is automatically output
from the right and left main speakers.
• Once the sound output level has been adjusted, the level will be
the same for all DSP programs.
Speaker Preset value (dB)
Center 0
Right rear 0
Left rear 0
Subwoofer 0
0107V520RDS35-42_EN 2/2/1, 5:37 PM40
41
English
BASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERA
TION
APPENDIX
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
DELAY TIME AND SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS
1
3
2
DELAY
CENTER
R SUR.
L SUR.
SWFR
Adjusting Method
Adjustments should be performed with the remote control
while watching the information on the display.
1 Press AMP(TUNER) on the
component selector.
2 Press TIME/LEVEL repeatedly to select the
item you want to adjust.
Each time you press TIME/LEVEL, the selected item
changes and appears on the display as below.
Delay time
Center speaker output level
Right rear speaker output level
Left rear speaker output level
Subwoofer output level
Note
• Depending on the setting of the SET MENU, you may not be able
to select all these items.
3 Press – or + to adjust the
delay time or speaker
output levels.
4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust the settings of
any other item.
Notes
• If “CENTER SP” or “REAR LR SP” is set to NON, or “BASS
OUT” is set to MAIN, the output level of that speaker cannot be
adjusted.
• When you adjust the output level with TIME/LEVEL, the settings
you made with the test tone will be changed.
• To adjust speakers other than the subwoofer, the adjusting
procedure using test tones on page 19 is recommended.
Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data
from being lost when this unit is set in the standby mode.
If, however, the power cord is disconnected from the AC
power outlet or the power is cut for more than one week,
the latest values for the delay time and the center/rear/
subwoofer output levels that were set will automatically
return to the preset values. If so, adjust the delay time
and output levels again.
0107V520RDS35-42_EN 1/31/1, 4:23 PM41
42
SLEEP TIMER
The SLEEP timer can be used to automatically set this unit
in the standby mode. This timer is useful when you are
going to sleep while enjoying a broadcast or other desired
input source. The SLEEP timer can only be set with the
remote control.
Notes
• First press AMP(TUNER), TAPE/MD, CD or DVD/LD on the
component selector to set the SLEEP timer for this unit.
• The SLEEP timer is effective for the components connected to the
AC OUTLET(S) on the rear panel of this unit.
Setting the SLEEP Timer
1 Play a source you want to enjoy when you are
going to sleep.
2 Press SLEEP repeatedly to
select the desired SLEEP
time.
Each time you press SLEEP, the
SLEEP time will change as
below:
3 The “SLEEP” indicator soon lights up on the
display after the SLEEP timer has been set.
The display returns to the previous indication.
Canceling the SLEEP Timer
Press SLEEP repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF”
appears on the display.
It will soon disappear and the “SLEEP” indicator will
go off.
Note
• The SLEEP timer can also be canceled by setting the unit in the
standby mode by using POWER on the remote control (or
STANDBY/ON), or by disconnecting the AC power cord from
the AC power outlet.
120 90 60 30
The SLEEP timer is off
(SLEEP OFF).
(This is the state before
SLEEP is pressed.)
SLEEP
BASS EXT.
Flashes
SLEEP
STEREO
TUNED
Lights up
0107V520RDS35-42_EN 1/31/1, 4:23 PM42
43
English
BASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERA
TION
APPENDIX
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
PRESET REMOTE CONTROL
It is possible to control this unit and other YAMAHA A/V components using the remote control supplied with this unit. It is
also possible to control components from other manufacturers (or some YAMAHA components) by setting the proper
manufacturer code (a signal assigned to each manufacturer and component).
Note
• For the notes on batteries, operating distance and names and functions of the remote control, refer to each description in this manual.
Component Selector Buttons
There are eight component selector buttons. Press one of these buttons which corresponds to the component you want to
control with the remote control. For example, if you press CD on the component selector, the remote control is set to the CD
operation mode, allowing the CD player to be controlled.
5
3
2
4
7
6
AMP(TUNER)
You can perform the basic operations of this
unit.
CD
The code for a YAMAHA CD player is
factory set.
DVD/LD & DVD MENU
An LD player can be controlled in
the DVD/LD mode. A DVD player can be
controlled in the DVD/LD and DVD MENU
modes. The code for a YAMAHA DVD
player is factory set.
TAPE/MD
The code for a YAMAHA MD deck is factory
set. (The code for the YAMAHA CD recorder
and tape deck can also be set.)
VCR
A VCR can be controlled.
TV
A TV can be controlled.
CBL/SAT
A cable TV or satellite tuner can be controlled.
Notes
• The button functions on the remote control differ depending on the operation mode. Refer to the following pages for details.
• When shipped from the factory, the YAMAHA manufacturer codes listed on page 49 are set for each dial position. If unable to operate your
YAMAHA A/V component, please try using another YAMAHA code.
Controlling the Components
Connected to This Unit
■ Example: To control YAMAHA CD
player
1 Make sure that the volume is set at the
minimum level.
2 Press AMP(TUNER) on the
component selector.
3 Turn on the power.
4 Press CD on the input selector.
5 Press CD on the
component selector.
6 Press p.
Refer to “Description of Each
Mode” for the CD player
operation buttons.
7 Adjust the volume.
If you set the remote control with the manufacturer codes
listed from page i at the end of this manual, you
can control other brands of components. Refer to
“Setting the Manufacturer Code” for details.
0108V520RDS43-49_EN 1/31/1, 4:23 PM43
44
Description of Each Mode
■ TAPE/MD MODE
Note
• TV VOLUME functions if you have set the code for your TV.
DISPLAY (MD/CD-R)
SLEEP
EFFECT
6CH INPUT
MUTE
TV VOLUME
VOLUME
POWER
This button turns this unit on if you have set the code
for a YAMAHA tape deck, MD recorder or CD
recorder. This button turns on the tape deck, MD
recorder or CD recorder that has a remote control with
a power button if you have set the code.
r REC/PAUSE
This button gives a pause in recording on a tape deck
or MD recorder.
p PLAY
This button plays a tape, an MD or CD-R.
b DIR A (TAPE)
This button selects the playing direction of deck A.
SKIP– (MD/CD-R)
This button skips to the previous track.
w REWIND (TAPE)
This button rewinds a tape.
SEARCH (MD/CD-R)
This button initiates a backward search on the track
that is playing to find the point from which you want
to listen.
Press TAPE/MD.
Input selector buttons
DECK A/B (TAPE)
This button selects deck A or B on a double-cassette
tape deck.
e PAUSE (MD/CD-R)
This button gives a pause in operation.
a DIR B (TAPE)
This button selects the playing direction of deck B.
SKIP+ (MD/CD-R)
This button skips to the next track.
s STOP
This button stops operation on a tape deck, MD
recorder or CD recorder.
f FAST FORWARD (TAPE)
This button winds a tape fast forward.
SEARCH (MD/CD-R)
This button initiates a fast-forward search on the
track that is playing to find the point from which you
want to listen.
• The dark-shaded buttons do not function even if you have set up the manufacturer code.
• Some of them may not function depending on the component you have. In this case, use the original remote control
supplied with your component.
PRESET REMOTE CONTROL
0108V520RDS43-49_EN 1/31/1, 4:23 PM44
45
English
BASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERA
TION
APPENDIX
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
■ CD MODE
Note
• TV VOLUME and TV INPUT function if you have set the code for your TV.
DISPLAY
SLEEP
EFFECT
6CH INPUT
MUTE
TV VOLUME
VOLUME
TV INPUT
Press CD.
POWER
This button turns this unit on if you have set the code
for a YAMAHA CD player. This button turns on the CD
player that has a remote control with a power button if
you have set the code.
p PLAY
This button plays a CD.
b SKIP–
This button skips to the beginning of the previous
track.
w SEARCH
This button initiates a backward search on the track
that is playing to find the point from which you want
to listen.
Input selector buttons
DISC SKIP –/+ (for a CD player with CD
changer)
These buttons skip to the next or previous CD.
e PAUSE
This button gives a pause in operation. The
button functions as PAUSE/STOP* for operating
a YAMAHA CD player under factory setting.
a SKIP+
This button skips to the beginning of the next
track.
s STOP
This button stops operation. The button functions
as PAUSE/STOP* for operating YAMAHA CD
players.
f SEARCH
This button initiates a fast-forward search on the
track that is playing to find the point from which
you want to listen.
y
PAUSE/STOP function
Press the button once to give a pause
in operation and press once more to
stop operation.
• The dark-shaded buttons do not function even if you have set up the manufacturer code.
• Some of them may not function depending on the component you have. In this case, use the original remote control
supplied with your component.
PRESET REMOTE CONTROL
0108V520RDS43-49_EN 1/31/1, 4:23 PM45
46
■ DVD/LD MODE
Note
• TV VOLUME and TV INPUT function if you have set the code for your TV.
CLEAR
TV INPUT
TV VOLUME
VOLUME
RETURN
MENU UP
MUTE
MENU LEFT
MENU DOWN
TITLE
DISC SKIP –/+
INDEX
MENU SELECT
MENU
+10
MENU RIGHT
EFFECT
TV INPUT
TV VOLUME
VOLUME
SLEEP
MUTE
SKIP –
STOP
SEARCH
DISC SKIP –/+
6CH INPUT
DISPLAY
PAUSE
PLAY
SEARCH
SKIP +
Press DVD/LD.
POWER
This button turns this unit on if you have
set the code for a YAMAHA DVD or LD
player. This button turns on the DVD or
LD player that has a remote control with a
power button if you have set the code.
■ DVD MENU MODE
Notes
• TV VOLUME and TV INPUT function if you have set the code for your TV.
• DVD MENU operations cannot be performed for some DVD players.
Input selector buttons
Press DVD MENU.
POWER
This button turns this unit on if you have
set the code for a YAMAHA DVD or LD
player. This button turns on the DVD or
LD player that has a remote control with
a power button if you have set the code.
Numeric buttons
• The dark-shaded buttons do not function even if you have set up the manufacturer code.
• Some of them may not function depending on the component you have. In this case, use the original remote control
supplied with your component.
PRESET REMOTE CONTROL
0108V520RDS43-49_EN 1/31/1, 4:24 PM46
47
English
BASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERA
TION
APPENDIX
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
■ VCR MODE
Note
• TV VOLUME, TV INPUT and TV SLEEP function if you have
set the code for your TV.
EFFECT
TV INPUT
TV VOLUME
VOLUME
TV SLEEP
MUTE
VCR STOP
VCR REWIND
VCR CHANNEL –/+
DISPLAY
VCR PAUSE
VCR PLAY
VCR
FAST FORWARD
CHANNEL
ENTER
CHANNEL
VCR POWER
+100
TV INPUT
TV VOLUME
VOLUME
TV SLEEP
MUTE
MENU LEFT
MENU UP
MENU DOWN
RECALL
CBL/SAT
CHANNEL –/+
DISPLAY
MENU SELECT
MENU
CHANNEL
ENTER
MENU RIGHT
CBL/SAT POWER
CHANNEL
EFFECT
TV INPUT
TV VOLUME
VOLUME
TV SLEEP
TV MUTE
VCR STOP
VCR REWIND
TV CHANNEL –/+
DISPLAY
VCR PAUSE
VCR PLAY
VCR
FAST FORWARD
CHANNEL
ENTER
CHANNEL
TV POWER
VCR REC
Press this button twice to
start recording.
■ CBL/SAT MODE
Note
• TV VOLUME, TV INPUT and TV SLEEP function if you have
set the code for your TV.
Press VCR.
Press CBL/SAT.
■ TV MODE
Note
• You can control your VCR if you have set the
code for it.
Press TV.
VCR REC
Press this button twice.
• The dark-shaded buttons do not function even if you have set up the manufacturer code.
• Some of them may not function depending on the component you have. In this case, use the original remote control
supplied with your component.
PRESET REMOTE CONTROL
0108V520RDS43-49_EN 1/31/1, 4:24 PM47
48
Setting the Manufacturer Code
You can set the code for the manufacturer of your
component after pressing the component selector buttons
other than AMP(TUNER).
1 Turn on your component to be used.
2 Press one of the
component selector
buttons which
corresponds to the
component to be
controlled.
3 Press both VOLUME
buttons (u/d) at the same
time for about four
seconds.
The indicator flashes twice.
4 Use the numeric buttons to
enter the four-digit
manufacturer code for the
component to be used.
Make sure that the
indicator flashes twice.
If the indicator does not flash,
repeat step 3 and re-enter the
code.
5 Press POWER (or any other button) on the
remote control to check if you have set the
code correctly.
If your component cannot be
controlled with the remote
control, try setting another code
for the same manufacturer.
Notes
• You can set only one code for one mode.
• In the DVD/LD and DVD MENU modes:
Be sure to press DVD/LD on the component selector before
entering the code for the DVD/LD player. You cannot set the code
for a DVD player after pressing DVD MENU on the component
selector. The code set in the DVD/LD mode is also
simultaneously set in the DVD MENU mode.
• If your component does not respond to any of the codes listed for
the manufacturer, use the original remote control supplied with
your component.
■ To use a second (and third) VCR
You can control a second (and third) VCR in the CBL/SAT
and DVD MENU modes if a cable TV or satellite tuner, or
DVD player is not being used.
Note
• In order to set a second (and third) VCR in the DVD MENU
mode, it is necessary to first set up the code for an LD player in
the DVD/LD mode.
1 Turn on the VCR to be used.
2 Press CBL/SAT or DVD
MENU on the component
selector.
3 Press both VOLUME
buttons (u/d) at the same
time for about four
seconds.
The indicator flashes twice.
4 Use the numeric buttons to
enter the four-digit code
for the second (and third)
VCR. Make sure that the
indicator flashes twice.
If the indicator does not flash,
repeat step 3 and re-enter the
code.
5 Press POWER (or any other button) on the
remote control to check if you have set the
code correctly.
If the VCR cannot be controlled
with the remote control, try
setting another code for the
same manufacturer.
PRESET REMOTE CONTROL
0108V520RDS43-49_EN 1/31/1, 4:24 PM48
49
English
BASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERA
TION
APPENDIX
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
Returning to the Factory Setting
■ To return to the factory-set codes
in all modes
1 Press one of the
component selector
buttons other than
AMP(TUNER).
2 Press both VOLUME
buttons (u/d) at the same
time for about four
seconds.
The indicator flashes twice.
3 Enter the code number
“9990”.
Make sure that the indicator
flashes twice.
■ To return to the factory-set codes
in each mode
1 Press one of the
component selector
buttons which
corresponds to the
component to be returned
to the factory-set code.
2 Press both VOLUME
buttons (u/d) at the same
time for about four
seconds.
The indicator flashes twice.
3 Enter the code number
“0000”.
Make sure that the indicator
flashes twice.
PRESET REMOTE CONTROL
The following codes are factory set.
Component selector button Component Code Set component Set code
TV TV 0101
CBL/SAT Cable TV 0006
VCR VCR 0002
DVD/LD DVD player 0008 (YAMAHA DVD player)
CD CD player 0005 (YAMAHA CD player)
TAPE/MD MD recorder 0024 (YAMAHA MD recorder)
We recommend that you write all the code numbers you have set on the table above.
0108V520RDS43-49_EN 1/31/1, 4:24 PM49
50
2 JAZZ CLUB —
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM
A digital sound field processor (DSP) based on the latest YAMAHA technology is built into this unit. It is possible to play
back various sound fields for the source you are listening to.
Note
• Regardless of the program name and characteristics listed in the table below, select the sound field program that sounds best to you.
Hi-Fi DSP Programs
■ For audio sources: Nos. 1 to 4
No. Program (group) Sub-program Features
1 CONCERT HALL —
Using this program increases the listening position range. This is a sound field
suitable for background music at parties.
Note
• Reverberations (sound effects) for realizing the sound field and unprocessed stereo from the left and right main speakers is output. The
sound is not output from the center speaker. (The sound is output when one of these programs is selected while playing a source encoded
with a Dolby Digital or DTS signal. If 5CH STEREO is selected, the sound is output from all speakers regardless of the input source.)
This is the sound field at stage front in “The Bottom Line”, a famous New York jazz
club. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering a
real and vibrant sound.
A large round concert hall with a rich surround effect. Pronounced reflections from
all directions emphasize the extension of sounds. The sound field has a great deal of
presence, and your virtual seat is near the center, close to the stage.
3 ROCK CONCERT —
The ideal program for lively, dynamic rock music. The data for this program was
recorded at LA’s “hottest” rock club. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center-left of
the hall.
4 ENTERTAINMENT DISCO
This program recreates the acoustic environment of a lively disco in the heart of a big
city. The sound is dense and highly concentrated. It is also characterized by a high-
energy, “immediate” sound.
5CH STEREO
CINEMA DSP Programs
■ For audio-video sources: Nos. 4 to 6
No. Program (group) Sub-program Features
4 ENTERTAINMENT GAME
This program adds a deep and spatial feeling to video game sounds.
5 TV SPORTS — Although the presence sound field is relatively narrow, the surround sound field
employs the sound environment of a large concert hall. With this program, you can
enjoy watching various TV programs such as news, variety shows, music programs
or sports programs. In a stereo broadcast of a sports game, the commentator is
oriented at the center position, and the shouts and the atmosphere in the stadium
spread on the surround side, while their spread to the rear is properly restrained.
This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources (such as old
movies). The program produces the optimum reverberation to create sound depth by
using only the presence sound field.
6 MONO MOVIE —
0109V520RDS50-52_EN 1/31/1, 4:24 PM50
51
English
BASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERA
TION
APPENDIX
INTRODUCTION PREPARATION
8 MOVIE THEATER 2 ADVENTURE 70 mm
ADVENTURE
This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the
sound design of the newest 70-mm and
multichannel soundtrack films. The sound field is
made to be similar to that of the newest movie
theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field
itself are restrained as much as possible.
GENERAL 70 mm GENERAL This program is for reproducing sounds from
70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films, and is
characterized by a soft and extensive sound field.
The presence sound field is relatively narrow. It
spatially spreads all around and toward the screen,
restraining the echo effect of conversations without
losing clarity. For the surround sound field, the
harmony of music or chorus sounds beautifully in a
wide space at the rear of the sound field.
DOLBY DIGITAL/
NORMAL
DTS DIGITAL
SUR./
ENHANCED
Analog, PCM,
Dolby Digital
in 2-channel
DGTL
ADVENTURE
Dolby Digital
(5.1-channel)
DTS ADVENTURE DTS
Analog, PCM,
Dolby Digital
in 2-channel
DGTL GENERAL Dolby Digital
(5.1-channel)
DTS GENERAL DTS
9 q/DTS
SURROUND
NORMAL PRO LOGIC/
NORMAL
Analog, PCM,
Dolby Digital
in 2-channel
Dolby Digital
(5.1-channel)
DTS DIGITAL
SUR./NORMAL
DTS
The built-in decoder precisely reproduces sounds
and sound effects from sources.
The highly efficient decoding process improves
crosstalk and channel separation, and makes sound
positioning smoother and more precise.
In this program, the digital sound field processor is
not turned on.
ENHANCED PRO LOGIC/
ENHANCED
Analog, PCM,
Dolby Digital
in 2-channel
DOLBY DIGITAL/
ENHANCED
Dolby Digital
(5.1-channel)
DTS
This program ideally simulates the multi-surround
speaker systems of the 35-mm film theaters. Dolby
Pro Logic decoding, Dolby Digital decoding or
DTS decoding and digital sound field processing
create precise effects without altering the original
sound orientation.
The surround effects produced by this sound field
wrap around the viewer naturally from the back to
the left and right, and toward the screen.
■ For movie programs: Nos. 7 to 9
No. Program (group) Sub-program Input source Features
7 MOVIE THEATER 1 SPECTACLE 70 mm
SPECTACLE
This program creates the extremely wide sound
field of a 70-mm movie theater. It precisely
reproduces the source sound in detail, making both
the video and the sound field incredibly real. This is
ideal for any kind of video source encoded with
Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS (especially
large-scale movie productions).
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM
Analog, PCM,
Dolby Digital
in 2-channel
DGTL
SPECTACLE
Dolby Digital
(5.1-channel)
DTS SPECTACLE DTS
SCI-FI 70 mm SCI-FI Analog, PCM,
Dolby Digital
in 2-channel
This program clearly reproduces dialog and sound
effects in the latest sound form of science fiction
films, thus creating a broad and expansive
cinematic space amid the silence. You can enjoy
science fiction films in a virtual-space sound field
that includes Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital and
DTS-encoded software employing the most
advanced techniques.
DGTL SCI-FI Dolby Digital
(5.1-channel)
DTS SCI-FI DTS
Notes
• The “ x ” indicator does not light up when selecting the sub-program “NORMAL” of the q/DTS SURROUND program.
• If “CENTER SP” in the SET MENU is set to NON, no sound is output from the center speaker.
• The effect sound is output from the main speakers when a monaural source is played with CINEMA DSP program groups 4 (GAME) and 5
to 8.
0109V520RDS50-52_EN 1/31/1, 4:24 PM51
52
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM
Presence DSP
sound field
Surround DSP
sound field
■ MOVIE THEATER 1 and 2
Most commercially available movie software has 4-channel (left, center, right and surround) sound information encoded by
Dolby Surround matrix processing and stored on the left and right tracks. These signals are processed by the Dolby Pro Logic
decoder. The MOVIE THEATER programs are designed to recreate the spaciousness and delicate nuances of sound that tend
to be lost in the encoding and decoding processes.
The 6-channel soundtracks found on 70-mm film produce precise sound field localization and rich, deep sound without using
matrix processing. This unit’s MOVIE THEATER 70 mm programs provide the same quality of sound and sound localization
that 6-channel soundtracks do.
When the input source is analog, PCM or encoded with Dolby Digital in 2-channel
These programs express an immense sound field and a large
surround effect. They also give depth to the sound from the
main speakers to recreate the realistic sound of a Dolby Stereo
theater.
70 mm SPECTACLE
70 mm SCI-FI
70 mm ADVENTURE
70 mm GENERAL
The built-in Dolby Digital or DTS decoder brings the professional-quality sound designed for movie theaters into your home.
With the unit’s MOVIE THEATER programs, you can recreate a dynamic sound that gives you the feeling of being at a
public theater in your listening room by using Dolby Digital or DTS technology.
When the input source is encoded with Dolby Digital (5.1-channel) or DTS (Tri-Field CINEMA DSP)
These programs use YAMAHA’s tri-field DSP processing on
each of the Dolby Digital or DTS signals for the front, left
surround and right surround channels. This processing enables
this unit to reproduce the immense sound field and surround
expression of a Dolby Digital- or DTS-equipped movie theater
without sacrificing the clear separation of all channels.
DGTL SPECTACLE
DTS SPECTACLE
DGTL SCI-FI
DTS SCI-FI
DGTL ADVENTURE
DTS ADVENTURE
DGTL GENERAL
DTS GENERAL
Presence DSP
sound field
Right surround DSP
sound field
Left surround DSP
sound field
y
• If a Dolby Digital signal or DTS signal is input when the input mode is set to AUTO, the DSP program will be automatically switched to
the Dolby Digital playback sound field or DTS playback sound field.
0109V520RDS50-52_EN 1/31/1, 4:24 PM52
53
English
BASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERA
TION
APPENDIX
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
TROUBLESHOOTING
Refer to the chart below when the unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or
if the instruction below does not help, set this unit in the standby mode, disconnect the power cord and contact the nearest
authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center.
■ General
Problem Cause Remedy
APPENDIX
Refer to
page
The unit fails to turn on
when STANDBY/ON (or
POWER) is pressed, or
enters in the standby
mode soon after the
power has been turned
on.
The power cord is not connected or the plug is
not completely inserted.
Firmly connect the power cord.
The IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch on the
rear panel is not fully set to the left or right
position.
Set the switch fully to the left or right position
when the unit is in the standby mode.
The protection circuit has been activated.
Make sure all speaker wire connections on this
unit and on all speakers are secure and that the
wire for each connection does not touch
anything other than its respective connection.
No sound and/or no
picture.
Incorrect input or output cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem
persists, the cables may be defective.
An appropriate input source has not been
selected.
Select an appropriate input source with INPUT
l / h or 6CH INPUT (or the input selector
buttons).
The speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections.
The main speakers to be used have not been
selected properly.
Select the main speakers with SPEAKERS A
and/or B.
The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume.
The sound is muted.
Press MUTE or any operation buttons to cancel
a mute and adjust the volume.
Digital signals other than PCM audio, Dolby
Digital or DTS signal which this unit cannot
reproduce are being input to this unit by playing
a CD-ROM, etc.
Play a source whose signals this unit can
reproduce.
The picture does not
appear.
The output and input for the video are
connected to different types of video jacks.
Make connections using the same type of jack
(between composites, S-VIDEOs, or
components) for both the input and output.
The sound suddenly
goes off.
Check the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch is
set to the appropriate position and then turn the
unit back on.
The protection circuit has been activated
because of a short circuit, etc.
Check the speaker wires are not touching each
other and then turn the unit back on.
The sleep timer has functioned.
Turn on the power, and play the source again.
The sound is muted.
Press MUTE or any operation buttons to cancel
a mute and adjust the volume.
Only the speaker on one
side can be heard.
Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem
persists, the cables may be defective.
18
18
16, 17
12 – 15
21
16, 17
21
22
22
—
14, 15
18
16, 17
42
22
12 – 17
0110V520RDS53-62_EN 1/31/1, 4:24 PM53
54
Problem Cause Remedy
Refer to
page
TROUBLESHOOTING
No sound from the effect
speakers.
The sound effect is off.
Press EFFECT to turn it on.
A Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS
decoding DSP program is being used with
material not encoded with Dolby Surround,
Dolby Digital or DTS.
Select another DSP program.
A 96-kHz sampling digital signal is being input
to this unit.
No sound from the
center speaker.
The output level of the center speaker is set to
minimum.
Raise the level of the center speaker.
“CENTER SP” in the SET MENU is set to
NON.
Select the appropriate mode for your center
speaker.
One of the Hi-Fi DSP programs (1 to 4) has been
selected.
Select another DSP program.
The source encoded with a Dolby Digital or
DTS signal does not have a center channel
signal.
No sound from the rear
speakers.
The output level of the rear speakers is set to
minimum.
Raise the output level of the rear speakers.
A monaural source is being played with the
program 9.
Select another DSP program.
No sound from the
subwoofer.
“BASS OUT” in the SET MENU is set to
MAIN when a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is
being played.
Select SWFR or BOTH.
“BASS OUT” in the SET MENU is set to
SWFR or MAIN when a 2-channel source is
being played.
Select BOTH.
The source does not contain low bass signals
(90 Hz and below).
Poor bass reproduction.
“BASS OUT” in the SET MENU is set to
SWFR or BOTH and your system does not
include a subwoofer.
Select MAIN.
The output mode for each speaker (main, center
or rear) in the SET MENU does not match your
speaker configuration.
Select the appropriate output mode for each
speaker based on the size of the speakers in
your configuration.
A “humming” sound can
be heard.
Incorrect cable connections.
Firmly connect the audio plugs. If the problem
persists, the cables may be defective.
25
50, 51
22
40
36
50, 51
—
40
50, 51
37
37
—
37
36, 37
12 – 15
0110V520RDS53-62_EN 1/31/1, 4:24 PM54
55
English
BASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERA
TION
APPENDIX
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
TROUBLESHOOTING
12 – 15
The volume level cannot
be increased, or the
sound is distorted.
The component connected to the REC OUT
jacks of this unit is turned off.
Turn on the power to the component.
The effect and surround
sounds cannot be
recorded.
It is not possible to record the effect and
surround sounds by a recording component.
A source cannot be
recorded by a digital
recording component
connected to the
DIGITAL OUTPUT jack of
this unit.
A source component is only connected to the
analog input jacks of this unit.
Connect the source component to the digital
input jacks of this unit.
The settings of the SET
MENU and some other
settings on this unit
cannot be changed.
“9 MEM. GUARD” in the SET MENU is set
to ON.
Select OFF.
This unit does not
operate properly.
The internal microcomputer has been frozen by
an external electric shock (such as lightning or
excessive static electricity) or by a power
supply with low voltage.
Disconnect the AC power cord from the outlet
and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds.
The sound is degraded
when listening with
headphones connected
to a tape deck or CD
player that is connected
to this unit.
This unit is in the standby mode.
Turn on the power of the unit.
There is noise
interference from digital
or high-frequency
equipment, or the unit.
Move the unit further away from such
equipment.
—
—
—
Refer to
page
The unit is too close to the digital or high-
frequency equipment.
Problem Cause Remedy
34
39
—
0110V520RDS53-62_EN 1/31/1, 4:24 PM55
56
After this unit has been exposed to a strong external electric shock (such as lightning and strong static electricity) or if you
mishandle the operation of this unit, it may not function properly. In these cases, set this unit in the standby mode, disconnect
the power cord, plug it back in after 30 seconds, and start operating.
TROUBLESHOOTING
FM
AM
26
27
28
26
26
—
■ Tuner
Problem
FM stereo reception
is noisy.
The characteristics of FM stereo broadcasts
may cause this problem when the transmitter is
too far away or the antenna input is poor.
Check the antenna connections.
Try using a high-quality directional FM
antenna.
There is distortion,
and clear reception
cannot be obtained
even with a good FM
antenna.
There is multipath interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate
multipath interference.
The desired station
cannot be tuned in
with the automatic
tuning method.
The station is too weak.
Use the manual tuning method.
Previously preset
stations can no
longer be tuned in.
The unit has been disconnected for a long
period.
Re-store the stations.
The desired station
cannot be tuned in
with the automatic
tuning method.
The signal is weak or the antenna connections
are loose.
Tighten the AM loop antenna connections and
orient it for best reception.
There are continuous
crackling and hissing
noises.
There are buzzing and
whining noises
(especially in the
evening).
Cause
Remedy
Refer to
page
Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire. This
will help somewhat, but it is difficult to
eliminate all noise.
Noises result from lightning, fluorescent lamps,
motors, thermostats and other electrical
equipment.
A TV set is being used nearby.
Move this unit away from the TV.
Problem Cause Remedy
Refer to
page
The remote control does
not work nor function
properly.
Wrong distance or angle. The remote control will function within a
maximum range of 6 m (20 feet) and no more
than 30 degrees off-axis from the front panel.
Direct sunlight or lighting (from an inverter type
of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is striking the remote
control sensor of this unit.
Reposition the unit.
The batteries are weak.
Replace all batteries with new ones.
The unit or other
component cannot be
controlled.
The component to be controlled has not been
selected.
Press one of the component selector buttons,
corresponding to the component to be
controlled.
The remote control cannot control system
components.
The manufacturer code has not been set up
properly.
Enter the code again.
Try setting another code for the same
manufacturer.
Depending on the manufacturer or the model,
some components cannot be controlled with this
unit’s remote control even though the code has
been set up properly.
Use the original remote control supplied with
your component.
7
7
3
43
—
48
—
■ Remote control
26
Use the manual tuning method. 27
Use a high-quality directional FM antenna.
26
Use the manual tuning method.
27
0110V520RDS53-62_EN 1/31/1, 4:24 PM56
57
English
BASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERA
TION
APPENDIX
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
SPECIFICATIONS
AUDIO SECTION
• Minimum RMS Output Power for Main, Center, Rear
20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 ohms ...................................... 70 W
1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 8 ohms ......................................................... 85 W
• DIN Standard Output Power
[Europe model only]
1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 ohms ....................................................... 105 W
• IEC Output Power
[Europe model only]
1 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 ohms ....................................................... 75 W
• Dynamic Power (IHF)
8/6/4/2 ohms ......................................................... 95/115/135/155 W
• Damping Factor
20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 ohms ................................................... 60 or more
• Frequency Response
CD, etc. to Main L/R (1 kHz, 150 mV, 8 ohms)
................................................................ 20 Hz to 20 kHz, ±0.5 dB
• Total Harmonic Distortion
CD, etc. to Main L/R (Effect Off, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 35 W, 8 ohms)
.................................................................................. 0.025% or less
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)
CD, etc. to Main L/R (Effect Off, 250 mV, shorted)
................................................................................ 100 dB or more
• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)
Main L/R ..................................................................... 150 µV or less
• Channel Separation
CD, etc. to Main L/R (1 kHz) ...................................... 60 dB or more
(10 kHz) .................................... 45 dB or more
• Tone Control (Main L/R)
BASS Boost/Cut ........................................................... ±10 dB/50 Hz
TREBLE Boost/Cut .................................................... ±10 dB/20 kHz
• Phones Output (1 kHz, 150 mV, 8 ohms) ................. 490 mV/390 ohms
• Input Sensitivity
CD, etc ................................................................... 150 mV/47 kohms
6CH INPUT ........................................................... 150 mV/47 kohms
• Maximum Input Signal
CD, etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) ........................................ 2.2 V or more
• Output Level
REC OUT ............................................................. 150 mV/1.2 kohms
SUBWOOFER ......................................................... 4.0 V/1.2 kohms
VIDEO SECTION
• Video Signal Type .......................................................................... PAL
• Composite Video Signal Level .................................... 1 Vp-p/75 ohms
• S-Video Signal Level
Y ............................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 ohms
C ........................................................................ 0.286 Vp-p/75 ohms
• Signal to Noise Ratio ...................................................... 50 dB or more
• Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT)
Composite, S-Video ...................................... 5 Hz to 10 MHz, –3 dB
FM SECTION
• Tuning Range ...................................................... 87.50 to 108.00 MHz
• Alternate Channel Selectivity (±400 kHz) ................................... 70 dB
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)
Mono/Stereo ................................................................... 76 dB/70 dB
• Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz)
Mono/Stereo ...................................................................... 0.2%/0.3%
• Stereo Separation (1 kHz) ............................................................ 48 dB
• Frequency Response ............................ 20 Hz to 15 kHz, +0.5, –2.0 dB
AM SECTION
• Tuning Range .............................................................. 531 to 1611 kHz
• Usable Sensitivity .................................................................. 300 µV/m
GENERAL
• Power Supply ............................................................. AC 230 V/50 Hz
• Power Consumption .................................................................... 250 W
Standby Mode ......................................................................... 0.96 W
• AC Outlets (Total 100 W maximum)
[Europe model] ......................................................... 2 (SWITCHED)
[U.K. model] ............................................................ 1 (SWITCHED)
• Dimension (W x H x D) ....................................... 435 x 151 x 390 mm
• Weight ....................................................................................... 10.0 kg
• Accessories ................................................................... Remote Control
........................................................................................... Batteries
............................................................................. AM loop antenna
.......................................................................... Indoor FM antenna
..................... 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter (U.K. model only)
...................................................................... Quick Reference Card
............................................................................ Connection Guide
* Specifications are subject to change without notice.
0110V520RDS53-62_EN 1/31/1, 4:24 PM57
58
GLOSSARY
■ Dolby Surround
Dolby Surround uses a four analog channel recording
system to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects:
two left and right main channels (stereo), a center channel
for dialog (monaural), and a rear channel for special sound
effects (monaural). The rear channel reproduces sound
within a narrow frequency range.
Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes
and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as
well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit
employs a digital signal processing system that
automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to
enhance moving sound effects and directionality.
■ Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives
you completely independent multi-channel audio. With
three front channels (left, center and right), and two rear
stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides five full-range
audio channels. With an additional channel especially for
bass effects, called LFE (low frequency effect), the system
has a total of 5.1 channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel).
Using two-channel stereo for the rear speakers, more
accurate moving sound effects and surround sound
environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The
wide dynamic range (from maximum to minimum volume)
reproduced by the five full-range channels and the precise
sound orientation generated using digital sound processing
provide listeners with previously unheard of excitement and
realism.
With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up to
a 5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for your
enjoyment.
■ DTS (Digital Theater Systems)
Digital Surround
DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog
soundtracks of movies with a six-channel digital sound
track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie
theaters around the world. Digital Theater Systems Inc. has
developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy the
depth of sound and natural spatial representation of DTS
digital surround in your home. This system is practically
distortion-free, clear 6-channel sound (technically, a left,
right and center channels, two rear channels, plus an LFE
0.1 channel as a subwoofer, for a total of 5.1 channels).
■ LFE 0.1 channel
This channel is for the reproduction of low bass signals. The
frequency range for this channel is 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This
channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a low
frequency range compared to the full-range reproduced by
the other 5 channels in a Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1 channel
systems.
■ CINEMA DSP
DIGITAL
Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally
designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best felt in
a theater having many speakers and designed for acoustic
effects. Since home conditions, such as room size, wall
material, number of speakers, and so on, can differ so
widely, it’s inevitable that there are differences in the sound
heard as well. Based on a wealth of actually measured data,
YAMAHA CINEMA DSP uses YAMAHA original sound
field technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital
and DTS systems to provide the visual and audio experience
of movie theater in the listening room of your own home.
■ SILENT CINEMA
YAMAHA has developed a natural, realistic sound effect
DSP algorithm for headphones.
Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound
field so that accurate representations of all the sound field
programs can be enjoyed on headphones.
■ Virtual CINEMA DSP
YAMAHA has developed a virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm
that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field surround effects
even without any rear speakers by using virtual rear
speakers.
It is even possible to enjoy virtual CINEMA DSP in a
minimum two-speaker system that does not include a center
speaker.
0110V520RDS53-62_EN 1/31/1, 4:24 PM58
59
English
BASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERA
TION
APPENDIX
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
■ S VIDEO signal
With S VIDEO signal system, the video signal normally
transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted as
the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the
chrominance through the S VIDEO cable. Using the S
VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss and
allows recording and playback of even more beautiful
images.
■ PCM (Linear PCM)
Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio
signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without using
any compression. This is used as a method of recording CDs
and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a technique for
sampling the size of the analog signal per very small unit of
time. Standing for “pulse code modulation”, the analog
signal is encoded as pulses and then modulated for
recording.
■ Sampling frequency and number of
quantized bits
When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times
the signal is sampled per second is called the sampling
frequency, while the degree of fineness when converting the
sound level into a numeric value is called the number of
quantized bits.
The range of rates that can be played back is determined
based on the sampling rate, while the dynamic range
representing the sound level difference is determined by the
number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the
sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies that
can be played back, and the higher the number of quantized
bits, the more finely the sound level can be reproduced.
■ I/O ASSIGN (SET MENU)
Although component is normally connected according to
jack names shown on the rear panel, this unit includes a
function that assigns jacks according to the component
being connected. If the component being used differs from
the component name shown for this unit’s digital input/
output jacks, it is possible to assign jacks according to the
component being connected. This makes it possible to
change the jack assignment and effectively connect more
component.
GLOSSARY
0110V520RDS53-62_EN 1/31/1, 4:24 PM59
60
INDEX
A
AC outlets ...................................................................................... 18
Antennas ........................................................................................ 26
B
BALANCE .................................................................................... 22
BGV function ................................................................................ 22
C
CBL/SAT mode ............................................................................. 47
CD mode ........................................................................................ 45
CINEMA DSP ......................................................................... 50, 58
Connections
Antennas ................................................................................. 26
Audio components (MD recorder, CD recorder and
CD player) .............................................................................. 12
External decoder ..................................................................... 12
Power supply cords ................................................................ 18
Speakers ................................................................................. 16
Video components (DVD player, VCR and
TV/digital TV or cable TV/satellite tuner) ............................. 14
D
Delay time ..................................................................................... 40
Display ............................................................................................. 8
DISPLAY SET (SET MENU)
DIMMER ............................................................................... 39
DOLBY D. SET (SET MENU)
D-RANGE .............................................................................. 38
LFE LEVEL ........................................................................... 38
Dolby Digital ................................................................................. 58
Dolby Surround (Dolby Pro Logic) ............................................... 58
DSP program
CINEMA DSP program .......................................................... 50
Hi-Fi DSP program ................................................................. 50
DTS ............................................................................................... 58
DTS SET (SET MENU) ................................................................ 38
Dust protection cap ........................................................................ 12
DVD/LD mode .............................................................................. 46
DVD MENU mode ........................................................................ 46
E
External decoder ............................................................................ 12
F
Front panel ....................................................................................... 4
H
HP TONE CTRL (SET MENU) .................................................... 37
I
IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch ............................................... 18
INPUT MODE (SET MENU) ....................................................... 38
Input modes ................................................................................... 23
I/O ASSIGN (SET MENU) ..................................................... 37, 59
L
LFE .................................................................................... 38, 39, 58
M
Manufacturer codes .................................................................... 48, i
Memory back-up ............................................................... 28, 36, 41
MEM. GUARD (SET MENU) ...................................................... 39
Muting ........................................................................................... 22
P
Package contents ............................................................................. 3
PCM ............................................................................................... 59
Playing ........................................................................................... 21
Power supply cords ....................................................................... 18
Preset stations
Exchanging preset station ....................................................... 30
Tuning in to a preset station ................................................... 29
Presetting tuning
Automatic preset tuning ......................................................... 28
Manual preset tuning .............................................................. 29
R
RDS stations
EON function ......................................................................... 33
PTY SEEK function ............................................................... 32
RDS mode .............................................................................. 31
Rear panel ........................................................................................ 9
Recording ...................................................................................... 34
Remote control
Basic operation ......................................................................... 6
Batteries .................................................................................... 3
Operation range ........................................................................ 7
Setup codes ............................................................................. 48
S
Sampling frequency ................................................................. 22, 59
SET MENU ................................................................................... 35
SILENT CINEMA ................................................................... 25, 58
Sleep timer ..................................................................................... 42
SP DLY TIME (SET MENU) ........................................................ 39
Speaker
Output balance (test tone) ...................................................... 19
Output levels (TIME/LEVEL mode) ...................................... 40
Placement ............................................................................... 10
SPEAKER SET (SET MENU)
BASS OUT ............................................................................. 37
CENTER SP ........................................................................... 36
MAIN LVL ............................................................................. 37
MAIN SP ................................................................................ 36
REAR LR SP .......................................................................... 36
Subwoofer ..................................................................................... 17
S VIDEO ....................................................................................... 59
T
TAPE/MD mode ............................................................................ 44
Test tone ........................................................................................ 19
Tuning
Automatic tuning .................................................................... 27
Manual tuning ........................................................................ 27
TV mode ........................................................................................ 47
V
VCR mode ..................................................................................... 47
Virtual CINEMA DSP ............................................................. 25, 58
0110V520RDS53-62_EN 1/31/1, 4:24 PM60
i
TV
Admiral 0411, 0451, 0911,
1021, 1081
Aiko 0891
Akai 0061, 0101, 0231,
1191, 1351, 1591,
1641, 1791, 1891,
1981
Akura 1331
Alba 1241, 1331, 2361
Albiral 1971
Amstrad 1301, 1511
Anam 1171
Arc En Ciel 0571
Arcam 0571, 0761
Aristona 0751
Arthur Martin 0451, 1641
ASA 0411, 0451, 0521,
0781, 0871, 1021,
1081, 1421, 2051,
2091, 2151, 2551
Astra 1511
Atantic 0761
Atlantic 0761
Atori 1511
Audiosonic 1181, 1321, 1511
Ausind 0491, 1411
Autovox 0091, 0351, 0481,
0491, 0601, 0781,
0951, 1051, 1081,
1391, 1421
Baird 1101, 1351
Bang & Olufsen 1081
Basic Line 1321, 1331
Bauer 1451
Baur 0041, 0061, 0121,
0131, 0221, 1561
Beko 2491, 2501
Blaupunkt 0221, 0231, 0241,
0251, 0471, 0741,
2201, 2211, 2221,
2231, 2241, 2261,
2571, 2581
Brandt 0571, 0651, 0731,
0901, 1821
Brionvega 1021, 1051, 1081
Britannia 0761
Bruns 0821, 0991, 1021,
1081
BSR 0391, 0691, 1621,
1901, 1981
Bush 0451, 1241, 1331,
1641, 1741, 2131,
2151
Bush (UK) 0481, 1561, 1611
Candle 0791
Century 1021, 1081
CGE 0491, 0811, 0981,
1401, 1531, 1611,
1621, 1981, 2201,
2251, 2271
Citizen 0791
Clarivox 0821, 0961, 1971
Clatronic 1181, 1331
Concerto 0791
Condor 0761
Contec 0151, 1171
Continental Edison 0571, 0651,
0901
Craig 1171
Crosley 0021, 0491, 1021,
1081, 1401, 1981,
2201, 2251, 2271
Crown 2541
Ctc Clatronic 0261
CXC 1171
Daewoo 0101, 1501, 1511,
2611
Dansai 0101
Decca 0271, 0581, 0601,
0971, 1101, 1691
Decca (UK) 0271, 0581, 0601,
1101, 1681
Degraaf 0451, 1351
Dixi 0991, 1511
Domeos 0101
Doric 1031
Dual 0091, 0601, 1611,
1641, 2101
Dual-Tec 0601, 1511, 1621,
2111
Dumont 0261, 0521, 0781,
1021, 1081, 1981,
2121, 2151
Dynatron 0101
Elbe 1551, 1971, 2031
Electro Tech 1511
Elektronska 0771
Elman 0261, 1621
Elta 1511
Emerson 0921, 1021, 1081,
1121, 1171, 1261,
1301
Erres 0101
Etron 1981
Europhon 0261, 0581, 0601,
0771, 1091, 1621,
2001
Fenner 0101, 1511
Ferguson 0281, 0371, 0551,
0651, 0781, 0861,
0881, 1131, 1181,
1361, 1461, 1971,
1991, 2281, 2311,
2341
Fidelity 0451, 0761, 2281
Fidelity (UK) 0561, 0591, 1931,
2281
Filmnet 1141
Finlandia 0451, 2321
Finlux 0021, 0261, 0491,
0521, 0781, 0811,
0871, 1081, 1411,
1421, 1981, 2051,
2091, 2121, 2151,
2551
Hitachi 0001, 0011, 0031,
0081, 0141, 0291,
0331, 0341, 0451,
0601, 0631, 0701,
1281, 1561, 1601,
1821, 1831, 1841,
1861, 1871, 1881,
1891, 1941, 1981,
2051, 2321, 2341
Hyper 0591, 0601, 1511,
1621
Imperial 0451, 0491, 0811,
0981, 1401, 1611,
1621, 2201, 2251,
2271
Ingersol 1511
Inno Hit 0581, 0601, 0841,
1101, 1331, 1371,
1511, 2011
Innovation 2591, 2601, 2611,
2621, 2641, 2651,
2661, 2711, 2721,
2761, 2771, 2781
Interfunk 0031, 0041, 0061,
0121, 0181, 0451,
0491, 1081, 1641,
1791, 1821, 1981,
2231
Irradio 0491, 1321, 1331,
1371, 1411, 1511,
2011
Isukai 1331
ITT 0031, 0041, 0051,
0061, 0071, 0081,
0181, 0411, 0451,
0491, 1241, 1291,
1351, 1501, 1601,
1641, 1741, 1921,
1981, 2091, 2331,
2431
ITT-nokia 0031, 0041, 0051,
0061, 0071, 0081,
0181, 0411, 0451,
0491, 1241, 1291,
1351, 1501, 1601,
1641, 1741, 1921,
1981, 2091, 2331,
2431
JVC (Victor) 0071, 0721, 1441,
1581, 1591, 1741,
1791
Kaisui 0591, 1321, 1331
Kamosonic 0601
Karcher 0591, 0601, 0841,
1091, 1321, 1511,
1561, 2051
Kawasho 0761
Kendo 0261
Kennedy 0021, 0351, 0951,
1981
LIST OF MANUFACTURER’S CODES
LISTES DES CODES FABRICANT
VERZEICHNIS DER HERSTELLERCODES
LISTA ÖVER TILLVERKARKODER
ELENCO DEI CODICI DEL FABBRICANTE
LISTA DE CÓDIGOS DE FABRICANTES
LIJST VAN CODES VAN FABRIKANT
First Line 1981
Fisher 0021, 0091, 0141,
0511, 0601, 0801,
0821, 0981, 1021,
1081, 1981, 2091
Forgestone 2281
Formenti 0451, 0491, 0761,
1081, 1451, 1541,
1981
Formenti-phoenix 0021, 0431,
0451, 0591,
1411
Fortress 1081
Frontech 0451, 1181, 1981
Fujitsu 1261
Funai 0391, 0691, 1171,
1181, 1261
Futuretech 1171
GBC 0021, 0141, 1321,
1511, 1621, 1981
GEC 0451, 1101, 1281,
2321
GEC (UK) 0031, 0081, 0581,
0601, 1101, 1281,
1561
Geloso 0021, 0411, 0451,
1321, 1511, 1621,
1981
General Technic 2681
Genexxa 0451, 1331
GoldStar 0591, 0601, 0761,
0791, 1371, 1491,
1511, 1561, 1621,
1641
Goodmans 0141, 1101, 1371,
1641, 2301
Gorenje 0981, 1061
Graetz 0451
Granada 0141, 0451, 0491,
0581, 0601, 1101,
1111, 1351, 1981,
2321
Granada (UK) 0081, 0141, 0451,
0491, 0581, 0601,
1031, 1311, 1521,
1561, 1641
Grundig 0221, 0231, 0471,
0491, 0711, 0741,
1381, 2021, 2041,
2141, 2151
Hanseatic 0021, 0121, 0141,
0431, 0591, 1561
Hantarex 0581
Hemmermann 0061
Hifivox 0331, 0571
Hinari 0071, 0141, 0451,
1261, 1351, 1511,
1641, 1981, 2011
08V520RDS-code(GB) 2/2/1, 5:44 PM1
ii
Konka 2701
Korting 0431, 1011, 1021,
1081, 1541
KTV 0601, 1171
Lenoir 0601, 1511
Leyeo 1181
Lifetec 2591, 2601, 2611,
2621, 2641, 2651,
2661, 2671, 2681,
2691, 2711, 2761,
2771, 2781
Loewe Opta 0121, 0131, 0581,
0611, 1081
Logic 1691, 2281
Logik 0551, 1681, 2281
Lowewe 0831
Luma 0351, 0451, 1901
Luxman 0791
Luxman Stereo Tuner 0791
Luxor 0001, 0061, 0181,
0341, 0421, 0451,
0461, 0491, 0601,
0671, 1351, 1371,
1561, 1601, 1911,
1921, 1981
Lyco 1181
Magnadyne 0021, 0061, 0261,
0581, 0641, 0771,
1021, 1081, 1621,
1981
Magnafon 0261, 0491, 0581,
0591, 0641, 0761,
1091, 2001
Manesth 0101
Marantz 0101
Marelli 1081
Mark 0101
Matsui 0061, 0451, 0601,
0691, 1101, 1151,
1241, 1271, 1301,
1511, 1561, 1681,
1691
Maximal 0071, 1981
McMichael 1281
Medion 2591, 2601, 2611,
2621, 2641, 2651,
2661, 2671, 2681,
2691, 2711, 2721,
2761, 2771, 2781
Memorex 1511
Metz 0231, 0741, 1001,
1041, 1081, 1481,
2071, 2081
MGA 1231
Micromaxx 2591, 2621, 2641,
2651, 2711, 2761,
2771, 2781
Minerva 0221, 0231, 0491,
1381, 2141, 2151
Mistral 2281
Mitsubishi 0141, 0201, 0231,
0661, 1191, 1201,
1231, 1671, 1691,
1741
Mivar 0491, 0501, 0581,
0591, 0761, 0771,
1371, 1431, 2031
MTC 0791
Multitech 0261, 0581, 0601,
0641, 0981, 1321,
1511
Murphy 0451, 2091
Murphy (UK) 0081, 1031
N.E.I. 0101, 0961
NAD 1341
NEC 0141, 1711, 1721,
1731
Neckermann 0451, 0601, 0981,
1081, 1561, 1931,
1981, 2211, 2231,
2241
Nediator 0101
Nicamagic 0761
Nikkai 1101, 1331, 1641,
1701, 2011
Nobliko 0261, 0491, 0591,
0641, 1381, 1411
Nogamatic 0571
Nokia 0031, 0041, 0051,
0061, 0071, 0081,
0181, 0411, 0451,
0491, 1241, 1291,
1351, 1501, 1601,
1641, 1741, 1921,
1981, 2091, 2331,
2431, 2461, 2791
Nordmende 0031, 0291, 0331,
0451, 0531, 0541,
0571, 1051, 1131,
1591, 1791, 1811,
1821, 1891, 1941,
2631
Oceanic 0321, 1651, 1981
Oceanic (F) 0031, 0061, 0321,
0441, 1661
Onceas 0601
Onwa 1171
Orion 0061, 0391, 0691,
0851, 1211, 1241,
1251, 1301, 1481,
1511, 1681, 1691,
1981, 2371, 2421
Osaka 2011
Osaki 1101, 1331, 2011
Osume 0151
Otto Versand 0021, 0121, 0141,
0221, 0601, 1561,
1741, 1981
Pael 0591, 1411
Panasonic 0031, 0201, 0211,
0451, 0701, 1311,
1751, 1961, 2561,
2741
Panoramic 2351
Pathe Marconi 0571
Pathe’ Cinema (F) 0431, 0591,
1621, 1661,
1971
Pausa 1511
Pauza 1511
Perdio 0891, 1101
Philco 0021, 0491, 0811,
0981, 1021, 1081,
1401, 1611, 1621,
1751, 2201, 2251,
2271, 2451, 2471
Philips 0101, 0361, 0591,
0621, 0681, 0751,
0761, 1021, 1081,
1281, 2031, 2281,
2291, 2431, 2441,
2511, 2731
Phoenix 1081
Phonola 0751, 1081
Pioneer 0291, 0451, 1341,
1821
Prandoni-prince 0411, 0451,
0491, 0581,
1411
Prandoni-promce 0451, 0491,
0581
Prima 0451
Profex 1981
Protech 0641, 1181, 1981
Quelle 0041, 0061, 0121,
0221, 0231, 0391,
0491, 0521, 0601,
0781, 1371, 1381,
1411, 1421, 1641,
1681, 2051, 2091,
2141, 2151, 2201,
2211, 2231, 2241,
2251, 2271, 2551,
2571, 2581
Radiomarelli 0101, 0451, 0661,
0771, 1081
Radionette 0031, 2051, 2091
Radiola 2291
Rank 0481, 2151
Rbm 2131, 2151
Rbm (UK) 0481
Rediffusion 0451, 0661, 1641,
1981, 2331
Rediffusion (UK) 0061, 0081,
1031
Rex 0071, 0101, 0351,
0411, 0451, 0951,
1901, 2061, 2101,
2111
Rft 0991, 2511
Roadstar 1321, 1511
Rotel 0151
Saba 0291, 0331, 0421,
0451, 0531, 0541,
0571, 0581, 0651,
0731, 0931, 1021,
1071, 1081, 1131,
1791, 1811, 1821,
1891, 1941, 2631
Saccs 1971
Saisho 0451, 0601, 1161,
1241, 1301, 1511,
1671, 1681, 1691
Salora 0011, 0041, 0061,
0071, 0341, 0451,
0671, 1291, 1351,
1521, 1561, 1601,
1641, 1911, 1921,
1931, 1981, 2321
Sambers 0261, 0491, 0581,
0641, 1091, 1371,
1411, 2001
Samsung 0101, 0601, 0841,
0981, 1101, 1181,
1371, 1511, 2011
Sanyo 0141, 0151, 0401,
0601, 0801, 0821,
0981, 1021, 1101,
1111, 1291, 1351,
1691, 1741, 2051,
2091, 2551
SBR 0681, 0751, 1281,
2281
Schaub Lorenz 0451
Schneider 0021, 0071, 0091,
0451, 0511, 0591,
0601, 0751, 1321,
1361, 1621, 1641,
2101, 2111, 2291
Scott 1171, 1261
SEG 0261, 0601, 0821,
0991
SEI 0641, 0691, 1081,
1301, 1481, 1981
Seleco 0071, 0101, 0351,
0411, 0451, 0951,
1901, 2061, 2101,
2111
Sentra 1601
Sharp 0141, 0151, 0191,
1761, 1781
Siarem 0021, 0261, 0581,
0641, 1021, 1081,
1981
Sicatel 1971
Siemens 0151, 0221, 0231,
0451, 0741, 2011,
2201, 2211, 2221,
2231, 2241, 2261,
2571, 2581
Silver 1181
Singer 0021, 0261, 1021,
1081
Sinudyne 0101, 0021, 0061,
0261, 0391, 0641,
0691, 0851, 0941,
1021, 1081, 1241,
1301, 1321, 1481,
1631, 1981
Skantic 0451
Solavox 0451, 1641, 2011
Sonoko 1181, 1511, 0101
Sony 0141, 0171, 1121,
1681, 1691, 2751
Soundesign 1171
SSS 1171
Stern 0071, 0101, 0351,
0411, 0451, 0951,
1901, 2061, 2101,
2111
Sunkai 0691
Supra 0791
Tandberg 0161, 0331, 0611,
1021, 1421, 1771,
1791, 2081
Tandy 0451, 0191, 1331,
1531
Tashiko 0141
Tatung 0271, 0581, 0601,
0971, 1101, 1681,
1691
Tcm 2621, 2641, 2711,
2761, 2771, 2781
Technics 1311
Techwood 0791
Teknika 1171, 1231, 1261
Tele 1141
Teleavia 0571, 0651, 0731,
1821
Telefunken 0291, 0301, 0311,
0551, 0731, 1131,
1471, 1591, 1791,
1801, 1811, 1821,
1991, 2161, 2171,
2181, 2191, 2201,
2251, 2271, 2521,
2631
Teletech 1511
Tempest 2381, 2391, 2401,
2411
Tensai 1331, 2091
Texet 0601
Thomson 0331, 0481, 0531,
0571, 0631, 0651,
0731, 0901, 1241,
1571, 1591, 1791,
1811, 1821, 1891,
1941, 2531
Thorn 0741, 0861, 2091,
2251, 2271, 2281
08V520RDS-code(GB) 2/2/1, 5:44 PM2
iii
Thorn-Ferguson 0281, 0371, 0551,
0651, 0781, 0861,
0881, 1131, 1181,
1361, 1461, 1971,
1991, 2281
TMK 0141, 0791, 1471
Toshiba 0141, 0381, 0481,
1221, 1271, 1701,
1741, 1851, 2151,
2801, 2811
Trans Continens 0451
Tristar 2281
Triumph 0481, 0581, 2121
Uher 0431, 0451, 0481,
0491, 0511, 1311,
1541
Ultravox 0021, 0261, 0591,
1021, 1081, 1981
Universum 1181, 2051
Univox 1971
Vegavox 0811
Vexa 0101, 1511
Videoton 2481
Vortec 0101, 0651
Voxson 0411, 0451, 0491,
1021, 1081
Waltham 0451
Watson 0431, 2201, 2241
Watt Radio 0021, 0061, 0261,
0591, 0641, 0761,
1091, 1971, 1981,
2001
Wega 0141, 1081, 1981
Wega Color 1021
Weltblick 0101
Weston 1621
White Westinghouse 0101, 0261,
0431, 0591,
0761, 1401,
1541
Yoko 0601, 1511
Zanussi 0071, 0101, 0351,
0411, 0451, 0951,
1901, 2061, 2101,
2111
Zoppas 0451
CABLE
Cabletime 1446, 1456, 1476
Clyde Cablevision 1426
Filmnet 1396, 1436
France Telecom 1386
GEC 1426
Jerrold 1416
Movie Time 1466
NSC 1466
Philips 1386
Pioneer 0006
Samsung 1496
Scientific Atlanta 1486, 1506
Starcom 1416
STS 1466
Tele 1436
Tele+1 1436
Teleservice 1406, 1476
Tudi 1376
United Cable 1416
Zenith 1406
SATELLITE TUNER
Akai 1276
Alba 0826, 1276
Amstrad 0166, 0796, 1016,
1026, 1296
Ankaro 0476
Ast 0406
Astra 0126
Barcom 0476
Blaupunkt 0966
Bmc Satellite 0106
British Telecom 1276
Bush 0826
Bush (UK) 0956
Cambridge 0196, 1276
Chaparral 0016, 0696, 1006
Columbus 0616
Connexions 0306, 0426
Discus Elipse 0856, 0866
Diskxpress 0426, 0476
Drake 1516
Echostar 0226, 0236, 0606,
0626, 0666, 0926,
0996, 1046, 1056,
1066, 1106
Elta 1286
Elta Sat 0146
Eurodec 1226, 1236, 1246
Ferguson 0046, 0176, 0186,
0296, 0846, 0956,
1306
Finlux 0976
Fracarro 0026, 0536, 0776
Fuba 0476, 0616, 0636,
1056
Giucar Record 0206, 0336
Grundig 0176, 0946, 0956,
0966
High Performance 0916
Hirschmann 0756, 0966
Hitachi 0446, 0516, 0706,
0946
Icx International 0886
ITT 0066, 0126, 0176,
0446, 1156
ITT/Nokia 0066, 0126, 0176,
0446, 1156
Jeemon 0146
Jerrold 0846, 0986
Johansson 0246
JVC (Victor) 1276
Kathrein 0116, 0266, 0276,
0366
Kosmos 0266
Kyostar 1036, 1086
Leng 0246
Lifesat 1326, 1346, 1356
Luxor 0126, 0136, 0446,
0466, 0506, 1156
Macab 0356
Maspro 0016, 0116, 0256,
0956
Medion 1326, 1346
Metz 0966
Micromaxx 1326, 1346
Mitsubishi 0966
Morgans 0596
Muratto 0406
NEC 0286, 0316, 0766,
0786, 0836
Network 0046
Nikko 1136, 1146
Nokia 0066, 0126, 0176,
0446, 1156, 1166,
1336
Norsat 0786
Otto Versand 0966
Pace 0046, 0176, 0296,
0936, 0956, 1306
Pace Mss 0946
Palcom 0616, 0686, 0706
Palsat 0396
Paltec 0706
Panasonic 0806, 1306
Pansat 1076
Philips 0326, 0346, 0476,
0956, 1126, 1186,
1196, 1206, 1216,
1306, 1316
Prosat 1176
Ptt Telecom 0306, 0896
Quelle 0966
Radix 1056
Rediffusion 0316, 0786
Rft 1186, 1196, 1206,
1216
Sagem 1256
Sakura 0566, 0816
Salora 0066, 0126, 0136,
0446, 0456, 0486,
0496, 0576
Samsung 0746, 0756
Sat 0406
Satcom 0896
Sateco 0646
Sector 1266
Sedea 1096
Sentra 0416
Siemens 0896, 0966
Sintrack 0906
Skylab 0476
Skyscan 0876
Sony 0736, 0946
Stella 0306
Strong 0156, 0396, 1036,
1086
Stv 0636
Tandberg 1116, 1366
Tandy 0916
Tantec 0616
Tatung 0516, 0546
Technisat 0086, 0096, 0526,
0556, 1056
Telecom 0306
Telemax 0586
Thorn-Ferguson 0046, 0076,
0176, 0186,
0956
Toshiba 0946
Triad 0406
Uniden 0036, 0216, 0676,
0716, 0726
US Electronics 0886
Vortec 0756, 1036, 1076
Vtech 0436
Winersat 0246
Wisi 0056, 0356, 0376,
0386, 0406, 0656,
1056, 1156
Wolsey 0916
Zehnder 0266, 0406
Zender 0406
VCR
Aiwa 0042, 0352, 0432
Akai 0042, 0422, 0492,
0582, 0612, 0642,
0652, 0762, 0912
Alba 0002, 0112, 0282,
0332, 0342, 0972
Amstrad 0322, 0432, 0452
Anitech 0002
Anitsch 1002
ASA 0012, 0052
Audiosonic 0002
Baird 0042, 0282, 0492
Bang & Olufsen 0042
Baur 0052, 0062, 0812
Blaupunkt 0062, 0092, 0252,
0462, 0672, 0992
Brionvega 0032
Bush 0002, 0282, 0332,
0342, 0512, 0972
Bush (UK) 0812
Capehart 0112
CGE 0042, 0432, 0762
Craig 0072, 0482
Crown 0112, 0282, 1212
Daewoo 0112, 0282, 1212
Dansai 0012
Daytron 0112
Decca 0042, 0052, 0432,
0942
Decca (UK) 0052
Degraaf 0052, 0132, 0432,
0532, 0602
Dixi 0442
Dual 0042, 0632
Dumont 0052, 0432, 0532
Dynatech 0432
Dynatron 0012
Elbe 0122
Elin 0072
Emerson 0012, 0162, 0202,
0432, 0512, 0522
Erres 0012
Ferguson 0042, 0712, 0722,
0852, 0902, 1012,
1022, 1082
Fidelity 0432
Finlandia 0052, 0532
Finlux 0012, 0042, 0052,
0082, 0262, 0382,
0432, 0462, 0492,
0532, 0572, 0602,
0912
First Line 0002, 0912
Fisher 0162, 0482, 0532,
0542, 0572, 0592
Formenti-Phoenix 0012, 0052
Frontech 0112
Funai 0432
GBC 0002
GEC (UK) 0022, 0052
Geloso 0002
General Technic 1172
GoldStar 0012, 0812, 0952,
1202
Goodmans 0002, 0072, 0282,
0432, 0502
Goodmans (UK) 0002
Graetz 0022, 0042
Granada 0052, 0132, 0532,
0572
Granada (UK) 0052, 0092, 0462,
0602, 0812, 0822
08V520RDS-code(GB) 2/2/1, 5:44 PM3
iv
Grundig 0052, 0062, 0092,
0232, 0252, 0262,
0752, 0802
Hanseatic 0052, 0812
Harman/Kardon 0922, 1202
Hcm 0002
Hinari 0002, 0202, 0412,
0442, 0522
Hitachi 0042, 0172, 0292,
0432, 0602, 0662,
0812, 1022
Imperial 0072, 0432
Ingersol 0442
Inno Hit 0002, 0052, 0072
Innovation 1142, 1162, 1172
Interfunk 0022, 0052
Irradio 0002, 0012
ITT 0022, 0032, 0042,
0072, 0292, 0492,
0532, 0572, 0762
ITT-Nokia 0022, 0032, 0042,
0072, 0292, 0492,
0532, 0572, 0762
Jensen 0042
JVC (Victor) 0042, 0102, 0142,
0272, 0742, 0762,
0782, 0902
Karcher 0052, 0072, 0812
Kendo 0492
Kenwood 0042, 0142, 0572
Lifetec 1142, 1162, 1172
Lloyd 0432
Loewe Opta 0052, 0092, 0152
Logik 0002, 0072, 0442
Luma 0162
Luxor 0492, 0572, 0812
M Electronic 0432
Magnadyne 0052
Magnasonic 0572
Manesth 0012
Marantz 0012, 0052, 0092,
0502, 1202
Mark 0012
Marta 0012
Matsui 0012, 0442, 0512,
0522, 0812, 0972
Medion 1142, 1162, 1172
Memorex 0012, 0132, 0432,
0482, 0532, 0572
Metz 0062, 0092, 0932
MGA 0912
Micromaxx 1142, 1162, 1172
Minerva 0062, 0092, 0252
Minolta 0172, 0602
Mitsubishi 0052, 0062, 0142,
0912, 0922
MTC 0072, 0432
Multitech 0002, 0052, 0062,
0282, 0432
Murphy 0432
N.E.I. 0012, 0052
National 0462
NEC 0042, 0122, 0142,
1202
Neckermann 0032, 0042, 0052,
0072, 0092, 0202,
0522, 0572, 0762,
0812
Nikkai 0112
Nobliko 0092
Nokia 0022, 0032, 0042,
0072, 0292, 0492,
0532, 0572, 0762,
1152
Nordmende 0042, 0102, 0142,
0192, 0222, 0242,
0392, 0402, 0632,
0732, 0742, 0762,
0782, 0792, 0832,
0842, 0872
Olympus 0462
Optonica 0132, 0502
Orion 0162, 0202, 0312,
0442, 0512, 0522,
0982
Osaka 0432
Osaki 0002, 0012, 0432
Otto Versand 0052, 0062, 0812
Panasonic 0022, 0212, 0462,
0672, 0992, 1092,
1102, 1182
Pentax 0172, 0602
Perdio 0432
Philco 1062
Philips 0052, 0082, 0092,
0152, 0182, 0362,
0372, 0472, 0502,
1072
Phonola 0052, 0152
Pilot 0012
Pioneer 0052, 0142, 0372,
0472
Portland 0112
Proline 0432
Pye 0052, 0152
Quartz 0572
Quelle 0012, 0032, 0042,
0052, 0062, 0072,
0092, 0202, 0462,
0552, 0942
Radionette 0022
Realistic 0012, 0072, 0132,
0432, 0482, 0502,
0532, 0572
Ret 1072
Rex 0042, 0742, 0782
Ricoh 0952
Saba 0042, 0142, 0192,
0222, 0242, 0392,
0632, 0732, 0742,
0762, 0772, 0782,
0792, 0872
Saisho 0162, 0202, 0292,
0442, 0512, 0522,
0972
Salora 0192, 0572, 0812,
0822, 0912
Samsung 0052, 0072, 0652,
1192, 1212
Sansui 0042, 0142
Sanyo 0482, 0532, 0562,
0572
SBR 0052, 0152, 0182
Schaub Lorenz 0022, 0042
Schneider 0002, 0012, 0052,
0072, 0432
SEG 0002, 0072
Sei-Sinudyne 0442
Seleco 0042
Sentra 0112
Sharp 0132, 0502, 0702
Shintom 0002
Siemens 0062, 0092, 0252,
0572
Sinudyne 0052, 0382, 0442,
0932
Sonoko 0282
Sony 0432, 0552, 0682,
0692, 0942, 0952,
0962, 1122, 1132
STS 0602
Sunkai 0512
Sunstar 0432
Sylvania 0432, 0912
Symphonic 0432, 0912
Tandegerg 0062, 0162, 0522,
0932
Tashiko 0132, 0432
Tatung 0042, 0052, 0432,
0922
TCM 1142, 1162, 1172
Teac 0042, 0432
Technics 0462
Teknika 0012, 0432
Telefunken 0042, 0192, 0632,
0732, 0742, 0762,
0782, 0882, 0892
Tempest 1032, 1042, 1052
Tenosal 0002
Thomson 0042, 0102, 0142,
0192, 0402, 0632,
0762
Thorn 0042, 0902
Thorn-Ferguson 0042, 0222, 0302,
0712, 0722, 0742,
0762, 0852, 0862,
0872, 0902
TMK 0522
Tonsai 0002
Toshiba 0042, 0622, 0912,
1212
Totevision 0012, 0072
Triumph 0922
Uher 0042, 0072
Ulravox 0032
Unitech 0072
Vector Research 0122
Videon 1162, 1172
Weltblick 0012
White Westinghouse 0032
Xenon 0162
Yamaha 0042, 1202
Yoko 0012, 0062, 0072
DVD PLAYER
Akai 0108
Denon 0368
Hitachi 0388
JVC (Victor) 0168, 0348
Kenwood 0288
Magnavox 0248
Mitsubishi 0268
Onkyo 0128, 0248
Panasonic 0048
Philips 0188, 0248
Pioneer 0208, 0228
Proscan 0308
RCA 0067, 0308
Samsung 0148
Sharp 0068
Sony 0028
Technics 0048
Thomson 0328
Toshiba 0088, 0248
Yamaha 0008, 0048, 0188,
0248
Zenith 0248
LD PLAYER
Aiwa 0137
Funai 0137
Hitachi 0047
Magnavox 0077
Panasonic 0027
Pioneer 0037
Realistic 0137
Samsung 0017, 0087
Sony 0057, 0097, 0107,
0117
Victor 0127
Yamaha 0007
CD PLAYER
Accuphase 0315
Adc 0865
Adcom 0785, 1015
Akai 0115, 0125, 0725,
0735, 0745, 0935,
1155
Arcam 1875
Arcam-Rotel 0165
Audio-Technica 0835
Audiosonic 0155
Awia 1105, 1235, 1245,
1765, 1915, 1935
BSR 0875
California Audio Lab 1075
Carrera 0555, 0875
Carver 0825, 1415
Cyrus-Rotel 0205
Denon 0045, 0955, 1045,
1595, 1795, 1805
Dual 1005
Elin 0185
Emerson 1015, 1285, 1675
Fisher 0105, 0595, 0605,
0825, 1165, 1175
Genexxa 0525, 0825, 0855,
0875, 0995, 1265,
1285, 1345, 1355,
1485, 1575, 1675,
1715, 1825
GoldStar 0555, 1185, 1195,
1585
Grundig 0175
Harman Kardon 0495, 0565, 0325,
1135, 1145, 1155
Hitachi 0065, 0585, 0685,
0945, 1005, 1015,
1225, 1545
Innovation 1995, 2005, 2015
ITT-Nokia 0185
JVC (Victor) 0385, 0395, 0455,
0575, 0585
Karcher 0485
Kenwood 0025, 0055, 0145,
0215, 0595, 0675,
0695, 0705, 0715,
0925, 1355, 1485,
1575, 1675, 1715,
1825
Korting 0175
Lifetec 2015
Light Control 1155, 1645, 1655,
1665
Linn 0165, 1875
Luxman 0265, 0275, 0795,
0805, 1295, 1305,
1555, 1925
Luxor 0185, 1895, 1905
Magnavox 1865, 1875
08V520RDS-code(GB) 2/2/1, 7:24 PM4
v
Marantz 0165, 0175, 0545,
0665, 1275, 1335,
1405, 1505, 1875,
1955
Matsushita 1095, 1605
MCS 0535
Medion 0075, 1995, 2005,
2015
Memorex 0525, 1015, 1265,
1275, 1285, 1675
MGA 1125
Micromaxx 2015
Mission 0165, 1875
Mitsubishi 1125, 1205
NAD 0255, 0285, 0295,
0305, 0345, 0135,
0755, 0765, 1315,
1325
Nakamichi 0635, 0645, 1565
NEC 0405, 0535, 0775,
0785
Neckerman 0155, 0225
Nikko 0835, 1165
Oceanic 0185
Okano 0155, 0225
Onkyo 0885, 1385, 1425,
1455, 1515
Panasonic 1055, 1075, 1615,
1625
Philips 0165, 0175, 0195,
1865, 1875
Pioneer 0095, 0335, 0425,
0435, 0445, 0525,
0855, 1035, 1945
Proton 0905, 1875
Quasar 1075
Radiola 1845, 1855
Radiotone 0485
Realistic 0825, 1015, 1265,
1275, 1285, 1575
Rotel 1875
Saba 1005
SAE 1875
Salora 0185
Sansui 0415, 0965, 0975,
0985, 1255, 1675,
1875
Sanyo 0625, 0825, 0845,
0915
Schneider 1845, 1855
Scott 1285, 1675
Sharp 0025, 0035, 1025,
1115, 1275, 1635,
1785, 1815, 1825,
1835
Sherwood 1275, 1445
Siemens 1085
Signature 1155
Sony 0345, 0355, 0365,
0375, 0865, 1685,
1695, 1705, 1715,
1725, 1735, 1745
Sytvania 1875
Tandberg 1885
Tashiko 1525
TCM 1985, 2015
Teac 0235, 0245, 1275,
1365, 1375, 1395,
1435, 1465, 1475
Technics 0465, 0475, 1065,
1075, 1625
Telefunken 1005
Theta Digital 1865
Thomson 1005
Toshiba 0755, 0765
Vector Research 0555, 0865
Yamaha 0005, 0015, 0085,
0345, 0615, 0655,
0815, 0835, 0895
CD-RECORDER/CD-RW
Hitachi 0304
JVC (Victor) 0334
Marantz 0314, 0324
Philips 0274
Pioneer 0284, 0294
Yamaha 0244
MD RECORDER
Kenwood 0214
Pioneer 0254
Sharp 0264
Sony 0224
Yamaha 0024, 0224, 0234
TAPE DECK
Akai 0124
Denon 0204
Grundig 0134
Harman 0044
JVC (Victor) 0194
Kenwood 0164
Korting 0134
Luxman 0054, 0064, 0074,
0084
Marantz 0134, 0144
NAD 0174
Onkyo 0184
Philips 0134, 0144, 0154
Pioneer 0034, 0114
Sony 0094, 0104
Yamaha 0004, 0014
08V520RDS-code(GB) 2/2/1, 5:44 PM5
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.
YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA
YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY
YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND
YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN
YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA
RX-V520RDS
Natural Sound AV Receiver
Ampli-tuner audio-vidéo
G B
OWNER’S MANUAL
MODE D’EMPLOI
BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG
BRUKSANVISNING
MANUALE DI ISTRUZIONI
MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES
GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING
RX-V520RDS
Printed in Malaysia ID
V723020
00RX-V520RDS(ML)-cv1/4 2/1/1, 4:41 PM1
*
SPEAKERS
MAIN
+
—
R L
A
—
+
B
CENTER REAR
(SURROUND)
R
L
+
—
S VIDEO
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
DVD
DVD
DVD
D-TV/CBL
D-TV/CBL
D-TV/CBL
IN
VCR 1
OUT
VIDEO SIGNAL
AUDIO SIGNAL
SUB
WOOFER
OUTPUT
IN
VCR 1
OUT
OUT(REC)
IN(PLAY)
CD
AUX
MD/CD-R
MD/CD-R
MD/CD-R
DIGITAL
OUTPUT
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
AM ANT GND
FM ANT
75
UNBAL.
TUNER
MAIN
CENTER
SUB WOOFER
SURROUND
DIGITAL
INPUT
6CH INPUT
CD
R
L
R
L
R
L
LR
AUDIO OUT S VIDEO
OUT
VIDEO
OUT
OPTICAL
V
V
AUDIO
OUT
S VIDEO IN
VIDEO IN
S VIDEO
OUT
VIDEO
OUT
OPTICAL
OUT
RLRL
DVD player
Main speakers A Main speakers B
RL
Rear speakers
Video signal
Optical signal
Signal flow
Center speaker
Subwoofer
system
Video Monitor
Connection Guide (when listening to a digital 5.1-channel source)
L
R
V
Analog signal
(U.S.A. model)
S Video signal
L R
S
S
O
O
S
*
RX-V520/RX-V520RDS
HTR-5450/HTR-5450RDS only
*
V728210 RX-V520/RX-V420 (ML)
SLEEP
TEST
A/B/C/D/E
MUTE
VOLUME
–/+
POWER
TIME/LEVEL
Quick Reference Card
DISPLAY (MD)
SLEEP
EFFECT
MUTE
TV VOLUME
VOLUME
POWER
REC/PAUSE
PLAY
DIR A (TAPE)
SKIP– (MD)
REWIND (TAPE)
SEARCH (MD)
PAUSE (MD)
DECK A/B (TAPE)
DIR B (TAPE)
SKIP+ (MD)
STOP
FAST FORWARD (TAPE)
SEARCH (MD)
TAPE/MD
DISPLAY
SLEEP
EFFECT
MUTE
TV VOLUME
VOLUME
POWER
PLAY
SKIP–
SEARCH
PAUSE
TV INPUT
SKIP+
STOP
SEARCH
CD
DISC SKIP–/+
DVD/LD
DISPLAY
SLEEP
EFFECT
MUTE
TV VOLUME
VOLUME
POWER
PLAY
SKIP–
SEARCH
PAUSE
TV INPUT
SKIP+
STOP
SEARCH
DISC SKIP–/+
V728130
SET
MENU
EFFECT
6CH INPUT
PRESET–/+
TV VOLUME
PRG+,
PRG–
Input selector
buttons
TV INPUT
AMP(TUNER)
6CH INPUT
Input selector
buttons
6CH INPUT
Input selector
buttons
6CH INPUT
Input selector
buttons
V520(Q)_Quick 2/1/1, 1:37 PM1
Quick Reference Card
RETURN
TITLE
CLEAR
INDEX
+10
MUTE
TV VOLUME
VOLUME
DISC SKIP–/+
POWER
Numeric buttons
TV INPUT
DVD MENU
MENU SELECT
MENU LEFT
MENU RIGHT
MENU DOWN
MENU
MENU UP
CHANNEL
CBL/SAT
CHANNEL–/+
DISPLAY
TV SLEEP
+100
MUTE
TV VOLUME
VOLUME
CBL/SAT
POWER
MENU SELECT
MENU LEFT
RECALL
MENU UP
TV INPUT
MENU RIGHT
MENU DOWN
MENU
CBL/SAT
CHANNEL
ENTER
VCR REC
TV
DISPLAY
TV SLEEP
EFFECT
TV MUTE
TV VOLUME
VOLUME
TV
POWER
VCR PLAY
VCR
REWIND
CHANNEL
VCR
PAUSE
TV INPUT
VCR STOP
VCR FAST
FORWARD
TV
CHANNEL–/+
CHANNEL
ENTER
*1
DISPLAY
TV SLEEP
EFFECT
CHANNEL
ENTER
MUTE
TV VOLUME
VOLUME
VCR
POWER
VCR PLAY
VCR
REWIND
CHANNEL
VCR
PAUSE
TV INPUT
VCR STOP
VCR FAST
FORWARD
VCR
CHANNEL–/+
VCR
VCR REC
*1
Press this button twice to start recording.
Appuyer deux fois sur cette touche pour commencer l’enregistrement.
Drücken Sie diese Taste zweimal, um die Aufnahme zu starten.
Tryck två gånger på den här knappen för att börja spela in.
V728130
*1 Premere due volte questo tasto per iniziare la registrazione.
Presione dos veces este botón para empezar a grabar.
Druk tweemaal op deze toets om met opnemen te beginnen.
V520(Q)_Quick 2/1/1, 1:38 PM2
Transcripción de documentos
GB RX-V520RDS YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA 00RX-V520RDS(ML)-cv1/4 1 RX-V520RDS Natural Sound AV Receiver Ampli-tuner audio-vidéo OWNER’S MANUAL MODE D’EMPLOI BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG BRUKSANVISNING MANUALE DI ISTRUZIONI MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING Printed in Malaysia ID V723020 2/1/1, 4:41 PM CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT. 1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference. 2 Install this unit in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean place with at least 30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the right and left, and 10 cm at the back of this unit for ventilation space — away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold. 3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid humming sounds. To prevent fire or electrical shock, do not place this unit where it may get exposed to rain, water, and/or any type of liquid. 4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in a environment with high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 5 On the top of this unit, do not place: – Other components, as they may cause damage and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit. – Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. – Containers with liquid in them, as they may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to this unit. 6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections are complete. 8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat, possibly causing damage. 9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords. 10 When disconnecting the power cord from the wall outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cord. 11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth. 12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. YAMAHA will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than specified. 13 To prevent damage by lightning, disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet during an electrical storm. 14 Take care of this unit so that no foreign objects and/ or liquid drops inside this unit. 15 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified YAMAHA service personnel when any service is needed. The cabinet should never be opened for any reasons. 16 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 17 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section on common operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty. 18 Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set this unit in the standby mode, and disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. This unit is not disconnected from the AC power source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even if this unit itself is turned off. This state is called the standby mode. In this state, this unit is designed to consume a very small quantity of power. ■ For U.K. customers If the socket outlets in the home are not suitable for the plug supplied with this appliance, it should be cut off and an appropriate 3 pin plug fitted. For details, refer to the instructions described below. Note • The plug severed from the mains lead must be destroyed, as a plug with bared flexible cord is hazardous if engaged in a live socket outlet. ■ Special Instructions for U.K. Model IMPORTANT THE WIRES IN MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE: Blue: NEUTRAL Brown: LIVE As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows: The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED. Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal of the three pin plug. CAUTION 0101V520RDS_caution_EN 2 1/31/1, 4:20 PM INTRODUCTION CONTENTS ADVANCED OPERATION INTRODUCTION Checking the Package Contents ............................. 3 Battery Installation in the Remote Control ............ 3 Battery Replacement .............................................. 3 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ....................... 4 4 6 7 8 9 SET MENU ......................................................... 35 Adjusting the Items on the SET MENU .............. 1 SPEAKER SET (speaker mode settings) .......... 2 HP TONE CTRL (headphone tone control) ...... 3 I/O ASSIGN ...................................................... 4 INPUT MODE (initial input mode) .................. 5 DOLBY D. SET (Dolby Digital set) ................. 6 DTS SET (DTS LFE level) ............................... 7 SP DLY TIME (center delay) ............................ 8 DISPLAY SET .................................................. 9 MEM. GUARD (memory guard) ...................... 35 36 37 37 38 38 38 39 39 39 PREPARATION Front Panel ............................................................. Remote Control ...................................................... Using the Remote Control ...................................... Display ................................................................... Rear Panel .............................................................. INTRODUCTION FEATURES .......................................................... 2 GETTING STARTED ......................................... 3 DELAY TIME AND SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS .......................................................... 40 PREPARATION SPEAKER SETUP ............................................ 10 Speakers to Be Used ............................................ 10 Speaker Placement ............................................... 10 CONNECTIONS ............................................... 11 ADJUSTING THE SPEAKER BALANCE .... 19 Before You Start Adjusting .................................. 19 Using the Test Tone .............................................. 19 SLEEP TIMER .................................................. 42 Setting the SLEEP Timer ..................................... 42 Canceling the SLEEP Timer ................................ 42 PRESET REMOTE CONTROL ...................... 43 Component Selector Buttons ............................... Controlling the Components Connected to This Unit .......................................................... Description of Each Mode ................................... Setting the Manufacturer Code ............................ Returning to the Factory Setting .......................... BASIC OPERATION Before Connecting Components ........................... 11 Connecting Audio Components ........................... 12 Connecting an External Decoder ......................... 12 Connecting Video Components ............................ 14 Connecting Speakers ............................................ 16 IMPEDANCE SELECTOR Switch ..................... 18 Connecting the Power Supply Cords ................... 18 Delay Time ........................................................... 40 Sound Output Level of the Center, Right Rear and Left Rear Speakers, and Subwoofer .......... 40 Adjusting Method ................................................ 41 43 43 44 48 49 SOUND FIELD PROGRAM ............................ 50 Hi-Fi DSP Programs ............................................ 50 CINEMA DSP Programs ...................................... 50 PLAYING A SOURCE ...................................... 21 Input Modes and Indications ................................ 23 Selecting a DSP Program ..................................... 24 Canceling the Sound Effect (turning off the effect speakers) ........................................................... 25 TUNING ............................................................. 26 APPENDIX TROUBLESHOOTING .................................... 53 SPECIFICATIONS ............................................ 57 GLOSSARY ....................................................... 58 INDEX ................................................................ 60 26 27 27 28 29 29 30 APPENDIX Connecting the Antennas ..................................... Automatic Tuning ................................................ Manual Tuning ..................................................... Automatic Preset Tuning (for RDS stations only) .................................... Manual Preset Tuning .......................................... To Recall a Preset Station .................................... Exchanging Preset Stations .................................. ADVANCED OPERATION BASIC OPERATION RECEIVING RDS STATIONS ........................ 31 Description of RDS Data ..................................... Changing the RDS Mode ..................................... PTY SEEK Function ............................................ EON Function ...................................................... 31 31 32 33 RECORDING A SOURCE ............................... 34 English 1 0102V520RDS01-09_EN 1 1/31/1, 4:20 PM FEATURES 5-Channel Power Amplification Other Features ◆ Minimum RMS Output (0.06% THD, 20 Hz – 20 kHz) Main: 70 W + 70 W (8 Ω) Center: 70 W (8 Ω) Rear: 70 W + 70 W (8 Ω) ◆ 96-kHz/24-bit D/A Converter ◆ “SET MENU” which Provides You with 9 Items for Optimizing This Unit for Your Audio/Video System ◆ Test Tone Generator for Easier Speaker Balance Adjustment ◆ 6-Channel External Decoder Input for Other Future Formats ◆ Video Signal Input and Output Capability (Including S Video Connections) ◆ Optical and Coaxial Digital Signal Input Jacks ◆ SLEEP Timer ◆ Remote Control with Preset Manufacturer Codes Multi-mode Digital Sound Field Processing ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ DTS Decoder Dolby Pro Logic Decoder Dolby Digital Decoder Hi-Fi DSP CINEMA DSP: Combination of YAMAHA DSP Technology and Dolby Digital, Dolby Pro Logic or DTS ◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP ◆ SILENT CINEMA Sophisticated FM/AM Tuner ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ 40-Station Random Access Preset Tuning Automatic Preset Tuning Preset Station Shifting Capability (Preset Editing) Multi-Functions for RDS Broadcast Reception • y indicates a tip for your operation. • Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the main unit or on the remote control. In cases when the button names differ between the main unit and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in parentheses in this manual. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “AC-3”, “Pro Logic” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Confidential Unpublished Works. ©1992-1997 Dolby Laboratories, Inc. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. US Pat. No. 5,451,942 and other world-wide patents issued and pending. “DTS” and “DTS Digital Surround” are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. Copyright 1996 Digital Theater Systems, Inc. All Rights Reserved. 2 0102V520RDS01-09_EN 2 1/31/1, 4:20 PM GETTING STARTED INTRODUCTION Checking the Package Contents Check that the following items are included in your package. Remote control AM loop antenna Indoor FM antenna Quick reference card 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter (U.K. model only) Connection guide BASIC OPERATION Battery Replacement If the remote control operates only when it is close to the unit, the batteries are weak. Replace all the batteries with new ones. Be sure to replace the batteries within about two minutes. If it takes longer than two minutes, the codes preset for the remote control will return to the factory settings. 2 Notes 1 Turn the remote control over and slide the battery compartment cover in the direction of the arrow. 2 Insert the batteries (AAA, R03 or UM-4 type) according to the polarity markings on the inside of the battery compartment. 3 Close the battery compartment cover. English 1 3 0102V520RDS01-09_EN 3 APPENDIX 3 • Use only AAA, R03 or UM-4 batteries for replacement. • Be sure the battery polarity is correct. (See the illustration inside the battery compartment.) • Remove the batteries if the remote control will not be used for an extended period of time. • If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before installing new batteries. ADVANCED OPERATION Battery Installation in the Remote Control PREPARATION Batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4 type) 2/1/1, 2:24 PM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Front Panel 1 3 2 6 78 45 9 0 VOLUME D I G I T A L RDS MODE/FREQ EON D I G I TA L SURROUND STANDBY /ON PTY SEEK MODE START INPUT MODE BASS TREBLE BALANCE PRESET /TUNING SPEAKERS A 6CH INPUT FM/AM INPUT B EFFECT PROGRAM PRESET/TUNING A/B/C/D/E EDIT MEMORY – + – + L ON R TUNING MODE OFF MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO PHONES S VIDEO SILENT q w r e ty u VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL VIDEO AUX i o pa s df g 1 STANDBY/ON 6 EON Press this switch to turn on the power of this unit or to set this unit in the standby mode. Before turning the power on, set the volume at the minimum level. Press this button to select the desired program type (NEWS, INFO, AFFAIRS, SPORT) when you want to tune in to a radio program of that type automatically. Standby mode In this mode, this unit consumes a very small quantity of power to receive infrared-signals from the remote control. 2 Remote control sensor 7 PTY SEEK START Press this button to begin searching for a station after the desired program type has been selected in the PTY SEEK mode. 8 INPUT MODE 3 Display Press this button to select the input mode among AUTO, DTS and ANALOG for the sources that send two or more types of signals to this unit. This shows various information. 9 VOLUME 4 PTY SEEK MODE Turn this control to turn up or down the volume. Press this button to set the unit in the PTY SEEK mode. 0 6CH INPUT 5 RDS MODE/FREQ Press this button to select the source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks. The source selected by pressing 6CH INPUT takes priority over the source selected with INPUT l / h (or the input selector buttons on the remote control). This receives signals from the remote control. When an RDS station is received, press this button to change the display mode among the PS mode, PTY mode, RT mode, CT mode (if the station offers those RDS data services) and/or frequency display mode in turn. 4 0102V520RDS01-09_EN 4 1/31/1, 4:20 PM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS q BASS i VIDEO AUX jacks Turn this control clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the low-frequency response. Connect an auxiliary audio or video input source such as a game console to these jacks. To reproduce source signals from these jacks, select V-AUX as the input source. w TREBLE Note • If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or the lowfrequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality from the center and rear speakers may not match that of the left and right main speakers. e BALANCE r SPEAKERS A/B When “ z ” appears on the display: This button is used to select a preset station number (1 to 8). Press l to select a lower and h to select a higher preset station number. When “ z ” goes off from the display: This button is used for tuning. Press l to tune in to lower frequencies, and h to tune in to higher frequencies. When this unit is in the PTY SEEK mode, press this button to select a program type. p A/B/C/D/E Press this button to select one of 5 preset station groups (A to E). a PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) t PROGRAM l / h s MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) Press l or h to select a DSP program when the effect speakers (center and rear) are turned on. The name of the selected program appears on the display. Press this button to store the broadcasting stations. Hold down this button for more than 3 seconds to begin automatic preset tuning (for FM stations only). y EFFECT d TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) Press this button to turn on or off the effect speakers (center and rear). If you turn them off, all Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals except for the LFE channel are directed to the right and left main speakers. In that case, the output levels of the right and left speakers may not match. Press this button to switch the tuning mode between automatic and manual. To use the automatic tuning method, press this button so that the “AUTO” indicator lights up on the display. To use the manual tuning method, press this button so that the “AUTO” indicator goes off. u PHONES jack f FM/AM Connect the headphones to the PHONES jack so that this unit outputs audio signals for private listening. When listening with headphones privately, set both SPEAKERS A/B to the OFF position. Press this button to switch the reception band between FM and AM. ADVANCED OPERATION Press this button to turn on or off “ z ” on the display and switch the function between for storing a broadcasting station (preset tuning) and for tuning. This button is also used to exchange the assignment of two preset stations with each other. BASIC OPERATION Set A or B (or both A and B) to the ON position for the main speaker system (connected to this unit) that you want to use. Set the button(s) to the OFF position for the main speaker system that you don’t want to use. PREPARATION This control is only effective for the sound from the main speakers. Turn the control to adjust the balance of the output volume from the right and left main speakers to compensate for sound imbalance caused by the speaker location or listening room conditions. o PRESET/TUNING l / h INTRODUCTION Turn this control clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the high-frequency response. g INPUT l / h APPENDIX Press these buttons to select the input source (DVD, AUX, MD/CD-R, TUNER, CD, V-AUX, VCR, D-TV/CBL) that you want to listen to or watch. The name of the selected input source appears on the display. English 5 0102V520RDS01-09_EN 5 1/31/1, 4:20 PM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Remote Control This section describes basic operation of this unit with the remote control. First, press AMP(TUNER) on the component selector. Refer to “PRESET REMOTE CONTROL” for full details. 3 POWER Each time you press this button, the unit switches between the power on and standby mode. 4 TEST Press this button to output the test tone for each speaker. 1 5 A/B/C/D/E, PRESET –/+ Press AMP(TUNER). 2 These buttons are used to select a preset station. A/B/C/D/E: To select one of a group (A to E) of preset stations PRESET –/+: To select a preset station number (1 to 8) 3 6 MUTE Press this button to mute the sound. To cancel mute, press this button again. q w e 4 7 VOLUME These buttons are used to adjust the volume level. u: To turn up the volume d: To turn down the volume 8 SLEEP 5 Press this button to set the SLEEP timer. 9 –/+ 6 TV VOLUME 7 These buttons adjust the settings of the SET MENU and TIME/LEVEL mode. 0 TIME/LEVEL 8 TV INPUT 9 Press this button to select the items in the TIME/LEVEL mode. q Input selector buttons r 0 t 1 Indicator This flashes in red when pressing a button on the remote control. If it flashes rapidly several times, press the selected button again. These buttons select the input source. CD: To play a CD TUNER: To listen to an FM (RDS) or AM broadcast MD/CD-R: To play an MD or CD recorder (or tape deck) DVD: To play a DVD D-TV/CBL: To watch a TV/digital TV or cable TV VCR: To play a video cassette AUX: To use another audio component V-AUX: To use another audio/video component w 6CH INPUT Press this button to play a source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks. 2 Component selector buttons Press one of these buttons which corresponds to the component you want to control with the remote control. (The proper code must be set for your component. Refer to “Setting the Manufacturer Code”.) When the component selector button has been pressed, the remote control is set to that component operation mode. 6 0102V520RDS01-09_EN 6 1/31/1, 4:20 PM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS e EFFECT Using the Remote Control Press this button to turn on or off the effect speakers (center and rear). r PRG+, PRG– INTRODUCTION Press these buttons to select a DSP program. Once you press SET MENU, these buttons are used for selecting the SET MENU item. Remote control sensor t SET MENU Press this button to select the items in the SET MENU. Within approximately 6 m (20 feet) ADVANCED OPERATION Handle the remote control with care. Do not spill water, tea or other liquids on the remote control. Do not drop the remote control. Do not leave or store the remote control in the following conditions: – high humidity or temperature such as near a heater, stove or bath; – dusty places; or – extremely low temperature. BASIC OPERATION Notes • • • • PREPARATION The remote control transmits a directional infrared beam. Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the infrared sensor during operation. When the sensor is covered or there is a large object between the remote control and the sensor, the sensor cannot receive signals. The sensor may not be able to receive signals properly when it is exposed to direct sunlight or a strong artificial light (such as a fluorescent or strobe light). In this case, change the direction of the light or reposition the unit to avoid direct lighting. APPENDIX English 7 0102V520RDS01-09_EN 7 1/31/1, 4:20 PM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Display 1 2 4 3 VIRTUAL DOLBY DTS DIGITAL DIGITAL PRO LOGIC PRO LOGIC ENHANCED MONO TV SPORTS MOVIE THEATER 1 2 ENTERTAINMENT DISCO 5CH STEREO 78 9 6 5 PS PTY CONCERT HALL JAZZ CLUB PTY HOLD ROCK CONCERT NEWSINFO BASS EXT. MEMORY GAME RT CT AUTO EON STEREO AFFAIRS SPORT TUNED SLEEP DSP PCM 0 dB ms SP AB q K HZ e w r t y u 1 t indicator 9 STEREO indicator The “t” indicator lights up when the built-in DTS decoder is turned on. This lights up when an FM stereo broadcast with sufficient signal strength is being received. 2 VIRTUAL indicator 0 x indicator This lights up when using Virtual CINEMA DSP. “ x ” lights up when the built-in digital sound field processor is on. 3 g and o indicators “ g ” lights up when the built-in Dolby Digital decoder is on and the signals of the selected source are encoded with Dolby Digital. “ o ” lights up when the built-in Dolby Pro Logic decoder is on. q v indicator 4 DSP program indicators This lights up when headphones are connected. This indicates the name of the selected DSP program. e Multi-information display 5 PTY HOLD indicator This display shows various information: for example the name of the selected input source and the various settings during adjustment with the SET MENU. The current station frequency and band (FM or AM) also appear when the tuner is selected as the input source. This lights up while searching for stations in the PTY SEEK mode. 6 RDS mode indicators The name(s) of the RDS data offered by the currently received RDS station light(s) up. Illumination of the red indicator next to the RDS data name shows that the corresponding RDS mode is now selected. 7 EON indicator This lights up when an RDS station that offers the EON data service is being received. 8 AUTO indicator This lights up when the unit is in the automatic tuning mode. This lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (pulse code modulation) digital audio signals. w Headphones indicator r MEMORY indicator This flashes for about 5 seconds after pressing MEMORY. During this period, the displayed station can be stored in the memory. t Program type name indicators The name of the selected program type lights up when the “EON” indicator lights up. y TUNED indicator This lights up when this unit tunes in to a station. u SLEEP indicator This lights up while the built-in SLEEP timer is on. 8 0102V520RDS01-09_EN 8 2/2/1, 5:34 PM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Rear Panel 1 2 3 4 R TUNER AM ANT GND + – SPEAKERS 7 – + L FM ANT MAINS A COAXIAL 75 UNBAL. 8 INTRODUCTION DIGITAL INPUT CD 6 5 MAIN OPTICAL D-TV/CBL 6CH INPUT MAIN DVD SURROUND L L CENTER DVD D-TV/CBL B VIDEO SIGNAL IN VCR 1 OUT MONITOR OUT VIDEO MD/CD-R CENTER S VIDEO R R SUB WOOFER + OPTICAL MD/CD-R IMPEDANCE SELECTOR AC OUTLETS SET BEFORE POWER ON SWITCHED 100W MAX. TOTAL MAIN A OR B: 8 A + B:16 CENTER :8 REAR :8 REAR R (SURROUND) L MAIN A OR B: 4 A + B: 8 :6 :6 CENTER REAR L MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER PREPARATION – R DIGITAL OUTPUT AUX CD IN(PLAY) OUT(REC) MD/CD-R IN DVD D-TV/CBL AUDIO SIGNAL 9 OUT VCR 1 0 q (Europe model) 1 DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks 8 AC OUTLET(S) 2 DIGITAL INPUT jacks Use these outlets to supply power to your other audio/video components (see page 18). 3 6CH INPUT jacks See pages 12 and 13 for connection information. See page 26 for connection information. 5 Video component jacks See pages 14 and 15 for connection information. 6 Speaker terminals See pages 16 and 17 for connection information. 9 Audio component jacks See pages 12 and 13 for connection information. 0 SUBWOOFER jack See page 17 for connection information. q IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch Use this switch to match the amplifier output to your speaker impedance. Set this unit in the standby mode before you change the setting of this switch (see page 18). 7 AC power cord ADVANCED OPERATION 4 Antenna input terminals BASIC OPERATION As this terminal is used for an examination in the factory, do not connect any equipment to this terminal. SUB WOOFER OUTPUT Connect to a power outlet. APPENDIX English 9 0102V520RDS01-09_EN 9 1/31/1, 4:21 PM PREPARATION SPEAKER SETUP Speakers to Be Used This unit is designed to provide the best sound-field quality with a 5-speaker system, using main speakers, rear speakers and a center speaker. If you use different brands of speakers (with different tonal qualities) in your system, the tone of a moving human voice and other types of sound may not shift smoothly. We recommend that you use speakers from the same manufacture to ensure even tonal quality. The main speakers are used for the main source sound plus the effect sounds. They will probably be the speakers from your present stereo system. The rear speakers are used for the effect and surround sounds, and the center speaker is for the center sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical to use a center speaker, you can do without it. Best results, however, are obtained with the full system. The main speakers should be high-performance models and have enough power-handling capacity to accept the maximum output of your audio system. The other speakers do not have to be equal to the main speakers. For precise sound localization, however, it is ideal to use highperformance models that can reproduce sounds over the full range for the center speaker and the rear speakers. ■ Use of a subwoofer expands your sound field It is also possible to further expand your system with the addition of a subwoofer. The use of a subwoofer is effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels, but also for reproducing the LFE (low frequency effect) channel with high fidelity when playing back a source encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS. The YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System is ideal for natural and lively bass reproduction. Speaker Placement Refer to the following diagram when you place the speakers. Main speaker (R) Rear speaker (R) Subwoofer Main speaker (L) 1.8 m Center speaker Rear speaker (L) ■ Main speakers Place the right and left main speakers an equal distance from the ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker from each side of the TV monitor should be the same. ■ Rear speakers Place these speakers behind your listening position, facing slightly inwards, nearly 1.8 m (approx. 6 feet) above the floor. ■ Center speaker Align the front face of the center speaker with the front face of your TV monitor. Place the speaker as close to the monitor as possible, such as directly over or under the monitor and centrally between the main speakers. Note • If the center speaker is not used, the sound will be heard from the right and left main speakers. In that case, “CENTER SP” in the SET MENU is set to the NON position. ■ Subwoofer The position of the subwoofer is not so critical, because low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better to place the subwoofer near the main speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the room to reduce the wall reflections. CAUTION Please use magnetically shielded speakers. Sometimes a video monitor may be adversely affected even when magnetically shielded speakers are used. Separate the speakers from the monitor if this happens. 10 0103V520RDS10-20_EN 10 1/31/1, 4:21 PM CONNECTIONS INTRODUCTION Before Connecting Components CAUTION Never connect this unit and other components to mains power until all connections between components have been completed. Be sure all connections are made correctly, that is to say L (left) to L, R (right) to R, “+” to “+” and “–” to “–”. Some components require different connection methods and have different terminal names. Refer to the instructions for each component to be connected to this unit. Use RCA-type pin plug cables for connecting audio/video components with the exception described later. The input and output jacks for pin plugs can be distinguished as follows: video signals (composite) V V White analog audio signals for the left channel L L Red analog audio signals for the right channel R R coaxial digital signals C C BASIC OPERATION Yellow PREPARATION When you connect other YAMAHA audio components (such as a tape deck, MD recorder and CD player or changer), connect it to the jacks with the same number labels as !, #, $ etc. After completing all connections, check them again to make sure they are correct. ADVANCED OPERATION APPENDIX English 11 0103V520RDS10-20_EN 11 1/31/1, 4:21 PM CONNECTIONS Connecting Audio Components ■ Connecting to digital jacks This unit has digital jacks for direct transmission of digital signals through either coaxial or fiber optic cables. You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to both the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the input signals from the COAXIAL jack. All digital input jacks are acceptable for 96-kHz sampling digital signals. y • You can designate the input for each digital jack according to your component by using “3 I/O ASSIGN” in the SET MENU. About the dust protection cap Pull out the cap from the optical jack before you connect the fiber optic cable. Do not discard the cap. When you are not using the optical jack, be sure to put the cap back in place. This cap protects the jack from dust. Note • The OPTICAL jacks on this unit conform to the EIA standard. If you use a fiber optic cable that does not conform to this standard, this unit may not function properly. ■ Connecting a CD player y • The COAXIAL jack is available for a CD player which has coaxial digital output jack. • When you connect a CD player to both the analog and digital jacks, priority is given to the input signals from the digital jack. ■ Connecting an MD recorder, CD recorder or tape deck y • When you connect your recording component to both the analog and digital input and output jacks, the priority is given to the digital signal. Notes • When you connect a recording component to this unit, keep its power on while using this unit. If the power is off, this unit may distort the sound from other components. • Since digital output and analog output (REC OUT) are independent of each other, the analog signal is output only to the analog jack, while the digital signal is output only to the digital jack. Connecting an External Decoder This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (left and right MAIN, CENTER, left and right SURROUND and SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from an external decoder, sound processor or pre-amplifier. Connect the output jacks on your external decoder to the 6CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to match the left and right outputs to the left and right input jacks for the main and surround channels. Notes • When you select 6CH INPUT as the input source, this unit automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and you cannot listen to DSP programs. • When you select 6CH INPUT as the input source, changing items of “1 SPEAKER SET” in the SET MENU is not affected (except “MAIN LVL”). 12 0103V520RDS10-20_EN 12 1/31/1, 4:21 PM CONNECTIONS SUBWOOFER OUTPUT MAIN OUTPUT OUTPUT External decoder CD player INTRODUCTION COAXIAL OUTPUT L C R L R R L CENTER OUTPUT SURROUND OUTPUT DIGITAL INPUT CD TUNER AM ANT GND 75 PREPARATION COAXIAL FM ANT UNBAL. OPTICAL D-TV/CBL 6CH INPUT MAIN DVD L SURROUND L CENTER DVD D-TV/CBL VIDEO SIGNAL IN VCR 1 OUT MONITOR OUT VIDEO MD/CD-R S VIDEO R R SUB WOOFER OPTICAL MD/CD-R L R DIGITAL OUTPUT L AUX CD R OUTPUT IN DVD D-TV/CBL AUDIO SIGNAL O OUT VCR 1 L R L OUTPUT MD recorder or CD recorder ADVANCED OPERATION OPTICAL INPUT O R INPUT Audio component BASIC OPERATION (Europe model) IN(PLAY) OUT(REC) MD/CD-R OPTICAL OUTPUT indicates signal direction indicates left analog cables R indicates right analog cables O indicates optical cables C indicates coaxial cables APPENDIX L English 13 0103V520RDS10-20_EN 13 1/31/1, 4:21 PM CONNECTIONS Connecting Video Components ■ Audio signal jacks Be sure to connect the right channel (R), left channel (L), input (IN) and output (OUT) properly. ■ Video signal jacks Be sure to connect the input (IN) and output (OUT) properly. ■ TV monitor with a 21-pin connector Make a connection as shown on page 15 with a commercially available SCART-plug connector cable. ■ S VIDEO jacks Video monitor DVD player S VIDEO OUT S VIDEO IN S D-TV/CBL VIDEO SIGNAL IN VCR 1 OUT Notes • Use a special S VIDEO cable (commercially available) for the S VIDEO connection. • If video signals are input from both the S VIDEO input and composite input jacks, the signals will be directed to their respective output jacks. S DVD If your video component has “S” (high-resolution) video jacks, they can be connected to this unit’s S VIDEO jacks. Otherwise, connect the composite video jacks of your video component to this unit’s composite video jacks. MONITOR OUT VIDEO S VIDEO S S S S S Video signal Signal flow S VIDEO OUT S VIDEO OUT TV/digital TV, cable TV or satellite tuner S VIDEO IN VCR ■ VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel) S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R These jacks are used to connect any video input source such as a game console to this unit. OPTICAL VIDEO AUX S V L R O OPTICAL OUT AUDIO OUT R AUDIO OUT L VIDEO OUT Game console S VIDEO OUT 14 0103V520RDS10-20_EN 14 2/1/1, 2:23 PM CONNECTIONS Video monitor OPTICAL OUTPUT SCART-plug DVD player S VIDEO OUTPUT L R VIDEO OUTPUT S VIDEO INPUT V S INTRODUCTION AUDIO OUTPUT O VIDEO INPUT V S L V R No connection DIGITAL INPUT CD TUNER AM ANT GND COAXIAL FM ANT 75 UNBAL. PREPARATION OPTICAL (Europe model) D-TV/CBL 6CH INPUT MAIN DVD L CENTER SURROUND L DVD D-TV/CBL VIDEO SIGNAL IN VCR 1 OUT MONITOR OUT VIDEO MD/CD-R S VIDEO R R SUB WOOFER OPTICAL MD/CD-R L R O IN(PLAY) OUT(REC) MD/CD-R CD S IN DVD D-TV/CBL AUDIO SIGNAL V VIDEO S VIDEO OUTPUT OUTPUT R L SUB WOOFER OUTPUT R L AUDIO INPUT TV/digital TV or cable TV/satellite tuner R S S S VIDEO OUTPUT V VCR AUDIO OUTPUT V S VIDEO INPUT AUDIO OUTPUT ADVANCED OPERATION OPTICAL OUTPUT L OUT VCR 1 BASIC OPERATION AUX DIGITAL OUTPUT VIDEO OUTPUT VIDEO INPUT indicates signal direction L indicates left analog cables R indicates right analog cables O indicates optical cables V indicates video cables S indicates S-video cables 0103V520RDS10-20_EN 15 1/31/1, 4:21 PM English 15 APPENDIX When using an LD player Connect the LD player output to the DVD jack. If the LD player has an OPTICAL digital output jack, connect it to this unit’s OPTICAL DVD jack. If it has analog jacks, connect it to the analog DVD jacks. If it has an “RF OUTPUT jack” to output a Dolby Digital RF signal (AC-3), use a commercially available RF demoduclator and connect it to the OPTICAL DVD jack. If connecting a DVD player and an LD player, connect the LD player to the digital input jack (ex. D-TV/CBL) or the analog input jack (D-TV/CBL or VCR 1). For details on connections and operations, refer to the operation instructions for the LD player. Note that this unit’s remote control can be used to operate the LD player by setting the corresponding manufacturer code for the DVD/LD mode. CONNECTIONS Connecting Speakers Be sure to connect the right channel (R), left channel (L), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are faulty, no sound will be heard from the speakers, and if the polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound will be unnatural and lack bass. CAUTION • Use speakers with the specified impedance shown on the rear panel of this unit. • Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other and do not let them touch any metal part of this unit. This could damage the unit and/or speakers. ■ Speaker cables 1 Remove approx. 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation from each of the speaker cables. 2 Twist the exposed wires of the cable together to prevent short circuits. 10 mm (3/8”) 1 2 ■ Connecting to the MAIN SPEAKERS terminals Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) 2 1 3 1 2 Unscrew the knob. 3 Tighten the knob to secure the wire. Insert one bare wire into the hole in the side of each terminal. ■ Connecting to the REAR and CENTER SPEAKERS terminals Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) 1 3 2 1 2 Open the tab. 3 Return the tab to secure the wire. Insert one bare wire into the hole of each terminal. ■ Main speaker terminals One or two speaker systems can be connected to these terminals. If you use only one speaker system, connect it to either of the SPEAKERS A or B terminals. ■ Rear speaker terminals A rear speaker system can be connected to these terminals. ■ Center speaker terminals A center speaker can be connected to these terminals. 16 0103V520RDS10-20_EN 16 1/31/1, 4:21 PM CONNECTIONS Main speakers A Main speakers B Right INTRODUCTION Left Right Left (Europe model) R + – SPEAKERS – + L MAINS A MAIN PREPARATION B CENTER IMPEDANCE SELECTOR AC OUTLETS SET BEFORE POWER ON SWITCHED 100W MAX. TOTAL MAIN A OR B: 8 MIN. /SPEAKER A + B:16 MIN. /SPEAKER CENTER : 8 MIN. /SPEAKER : 8 MIN. /SPEAKER REAR REAR R (SURROUND) L + MAIN A OR B: 4 MIN. /SPEAKER A + B: 8 MIN. /SPEAKER : 6 MIN. /SPEAKER : 6 MIN. /SPEAKER CENTER REAR – SUB WOOFER OUTPUT Subwoofer system Center speaker BASIC OPERATION Right Left Rear speakers ADVANCED OPERATION ■ Subwoofer connection When using a subwoofer with built-in amplifier, including the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, connect the input jack of the subwoofer system to this jack. Low bass signals distributed from the main, center and/or rear channels are directed to this jack. (The cut-off frequency of this jack is 90 Hz.) The LFE (low-frequency effect) signals generated when Dolby Digital or DTS is decoded are also directed if they are assigned to this jack. APPENDIX Notes • Adjust the subwoofer volume according to the operation instructions for the subwoofer. (Fine adjustment is possible using this unit’s output level control of the effect speakers.) • Depending on the settings of “1 SPEAKER SET”, “LFE LEVEL (5 DOLBY D. SET)” and “6 DTS SET” in the SET MENU, some signals may not be output from the SUBWOOFER jack. English 17 0103V520RDS10-20_EN 17 1/31/1, 4:21 PM CONNECTIONS IMPEDANCE SELECTOR Switch WARNING Do not change the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch setting while the power to this unit is on, otherwise the unit may be damaged. If this unit fails to turn on when STANDBY/ON (or POWER) is pressed, the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch may not be fully slid either position. If so, slide the switch to either position fully when this unit is in the standby mode. Select the right or left position according to the impedance of speakers in your system. Be sure to move this switch only when this unit is in the standby mode. (Europe model) Switch Speaker position IMPEDANCE SELECTOR MAINS Main IMPEDANCE SELECTOR AC OUTLETS SET BEFORE POWER ON SWITCHED 100W MAX. TOTAL MAIN A OR B: 4 MIN. /SPEAKER A + B: 8 MIN. /SPEAKER CENTER : 6 MIN. /SPEAKER : 6 MIN. /SPEAKER REAR If you use one set of main speakers, the impedance of each speaker must be 4 Ω or higher. If you use two sets of main speakers, the impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. Left MAIN A OR B: 8 MIN. /SPEAKER A + B:16 MIN. /SPEAKER CENTER : 8 MIN. /SPEAKER REAR : 8 MIN. /SPEAKER Impedance level Center The impedance must be 6 Ω or higher. Rear The impedance of each speaker must be 6 Ω or higher. Main If you use one set of main speakers, the impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. If you use two sets of main speakers, the impedance of each speaker must be 16 Ω or higher. Right Center The impedance must be 8 Ω or higher. Rear The impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. Connecting the Power Supply Cords After completing all connections, connect the AC power cord to an AC power outlet. Disconnect the AC power cord if you will not use this unit for a long period of time. ■ AC OUTLETS (SWITCHED) (Europe model) Europe model .................................................... 2 OUTLETS U.K. model .......................................................... 1 OUTLET Use these outlets to connect the power cords only from your audio/video components to this unit. The power to the AC OUTLET(S) is controlled by this unit’s STANDBY/ON (or POWER). These outlets will supply power to any connected component whenever this unit is turned on. The maximum power (total power consumption of components) that can be connected to the AC OUTLET(S) is 100 W. MAINS IMPEDANCE SELECTOR AC OUTLETS SET BEFORE POWER ON SWITCHED 100W MAX. TOTAL MAIN A OR B: 8 MIN. /SPEAKER A + B:16 MIN. /SPEAKER CENTER : 8 MIN. /SPEAKER : 8 MIN. /SPEAKER REAR MAIN A OR B: 4 A + B: 8 CENTER :6 :6 REAR MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER To AC outlet SWITCHED 18 0103V520RDS10-20_EN 18 1/31/1, 4:21 PM ADJUSTING THE SPEAKER BALANCE Using the Test Tone The adjustment of each speaker sound output level should be performed at your listening position with the remote control. 3 1 INTRODUCTION This procedure lets you adjust the sound output level balance between the main, center and rear speakers by using the built-in test tone generator. When this adjustment is performed, the sound output level heard at the listening position will be the same from each speaker. This is important for the best performance of the digital sound field processor, the Dolby Pro Logic decoder, Dolby Digital decoder and DTS decoder. Note PREPARATION • Since this unit cannot enter the test mode while headphones are connected to this unit, be sure to unplug the headphones from the PHONES jack when using the test tone. 5 2,6 Before You Start Adjusting 2 1 1 Press AMP(TUNER) on the component selector. 2 Press TEST. “TEST LEFT” appears on the display. 3 Turn up the volume. You will hear a test tone (like pink noise) from each speaker for about two seconds in following order: left main speaker, center speaker, right main speaker, right rear speaker and left rear speaker. The display changes as shown below. VOLUME D I G I T A L RDS MODE/FREQ EON D I G I TA L SURROUND STANDBY /ON PTY SEEK MODE START BALANCE PRESET /TUNING SPEAKERS A 6CH INPUT FM/AM INPUT B EFFECT PROGRAM PRESET/TUNING A/B/C/D/E EDIT MEMORY – + – + L R ON TUNING MODE OFF MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO SILENT 4 L AUDIO R OPTICAL VIDEO AUX 3 Set the volume at the minimum level. 2 Turn the power on. VOLUME TEST LEFT STANDBY /ON 3 TEST CENTER Press SPEAKERS A or B to select the main speakers to be used. If you use two main speaker systems, press both A and B. SPEAKERS A ON B OFF Set BASS, TREBLE and BALANCE to the center position. BASS – TREBLE + – + BALANCE L R TEST L SUR. TEST R SUR. Notes APPENDIX 4 TEST RIGHT ADVANCED OPERATION 1 BASIC OPERATION INPUT MODE TREBLE BASS • If the test tone cannot be heard, turn down the volume, set the unit in the standby mode and check the speaker connections. • If the test tone cannot be heard from the center speaker, check the setting of “CENTER SP” in the SET MENU. English 19 0103V520RDS10-20_EN 19 1/31/1, 4:21 PM ADJUSTING THE SPEAKER BALANCE 4 Adjust BALANCE on the front panel so that the sound output level of the right main speaker and the left main speaker is the same. BALANCE L R Front panel 5 Press –/+ repeatedly to adjust the output level of the speaker currently outputting the test tone so that it becomes almost the same as that of the main speakers. While adjusting, the test tone is heard from the selected speaker. 6 When the adjustment is complete, press TEST. The test tone stops. Notes • If “CENTER SP” in the SET MENU is set to the NON position, the sound output level of the center speaker cannot be adjusted in step 5. The center channel sound is automatically output from the right and left main speakers. • For details on adjusting the subwoofer speaker, refer to “DELAY TIME AND SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS” on page 40. • After adjusting with the test tone, it is possible to adjust the speaker level to taste while listening to the playback of an actual source. Refer to “DELAY TIME AND SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS” on page 40. y • Once you have completed the adjustments, you can only adjust the overall volume level of your audio system by using VOLUME (or VOLUME (u/d)). • If there is insufficient sound output from the center and rear speakers, you may decrease the main speaker output level by setting “MAIN LVL” in the SET MENU to “–10 dB”. 20 0103V520RDS10-20_EN 20 1/31/1, 4:21 PM BASIC OPERATION PLAYING A SOURCE 2 4 1,6 Select the desired input source with INPUT l / h (or the input selector buttons). (Turn on the video monitor for video sources.) The name of the selected input source appears on the display. VOLUME D I G I T A L RDS MODE/FREQ INPUT EON INTRODUCTION When using the remote control, press AMP(TUNER) on the component selector. D I G I TA L SURROUND STANDBY /ON PTY SEEK MODE START or INPUT MODE BASS TREBLE BALANCE PRESET /TUNING SPEAKERS A B 6CH INPUT FM/AM INPUT EFFECT PROGRAM PRESET/TUNING A/B/C/D/E Front panel EDIT MEMORY – + – + L R ON TUNING MODE OFF Remote control MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO 3 6 AUDIO R OPTICAL PREPARATION SILENT L VIDEO AUX 7 4 Input source 6 2 7 4 6CH INPUT or Front panel 1 Turn the power on. or • An audio source can not be played if “6CH INPUT” appears. Press 6CH INPUT to turn off “6CH INPUT”. • If you select and play a video source when “6CH INPUT” appears, the playback result will be a video image from the video source and the sound from the audio source selected by using “6CH INPUT”. y Front panel Remote control • The current input mode is also shown. Refer to “Input Modes and Indications” on page 23 for details. SPEAKERS A ON B APPENDIX Press SPEAKERS A or B to select the main speakers to be used. If you use two main speaker systems, press both A and B. ADVANCED OPERATION Notes STANDBY /ON 3 Remote control VOLUME Set the volume at the minimum level. Front panel 2 BASIC OPERATION To select a source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks Press 6CH INPUT so that “6CH INPUT” appears on the display. OFF Front panel English 21 0104V520RDS21-25_EN 21 1/31/1, 4:22 PM PLAYING A SOURCE 5 Play the source. Refer to the instructions for the source component (and “TUNING” for details). Note • When controlling an audio/video component (MD recorder, CD player, DVD player, tape deck, etc.) with the remote control, press one of the component selector buttons, (TAPE/MD, CD, DVD/ LD, etc.), which corresponds to the component you want to control. Refer to “PRESET REMOTE CONTROL”. 6 ■ Notes on the digital signal The digital input jacks of this unit can also handle 96-kHz sampling digital signals. (To utilize this, use a source that supports 96-kHz sampling digital signals and set the player for digital output. Refer to the operation instructions for the player.) Note the following when a 96-kHz sampling digital signal is input to this unit: 1. The following indication will appear on the display. Adjust the volume to the desired output level. VOLUME PCM or Front panel Remote control If desired, adjust BASS, TREBLE, BALANCE, etc. These controls are only effective for the sound from the main speakers. • BASS controls the low-frequency response. • TREBLE controls the high-frequency response. • BALANCE adjusts the balance of the output volume from the right and left main speakers. BASS – BALANCE TREBLE + + – L R Front panel 7 Use the digital sound field processor. Refer to “Selecting a DSP Program”. K HZ 2. DSP programs cannot be selected. Sound will be output as normal 2-channel stereo sound from only the left and right main speakers. Note • If “MAIN SP” in the SET MENU is set to SMALL and “BASS OUT” is set to SWFR or “BASS OUT” is set to BOTH, the sound is also output from the subwoofer. 3. Adjustment of the speaker output level described on page 40 cannot be made (except the level of the subwoofer). ■ BGV (background video) function The BGV function allows you to combine a video image from a video source with a sound from an audio source. (For example, you can listen to classical music while you are watching a video.) This function can only be controlled with the remote control. Play a video source, and then select an audio source with the input selector buttons on the remote control. The BGV function does not work if you select the audio source with INPUT l / h on the front panel. PROGRAM or Remote control Front panel ■ To mute the sound Use this when you want to temporarily mute audio output. Press MUTE on the remote control. To restore the audio output to the previous volume level, press MUTE again. Note • During muting, “MUTE ON” appears on the display. ■ When you have finished using this unit Press STANDBY/ON (or POWER) to set this unit in the standby mode. 22 0104V520RDS21-25_EN 22 1/31/1, 4:22 PM PLAYING A SOURCE Input Modes and Indications When using the remote control, press AMP(TUNER) on the component selector. INPUT MODE or Front panel Remote control AUTO: ADVANCED OPERATION In this mode, the input signal is automatically selected in the following order: 1) Dolby Digital or DTS signal 2) Digital (PCM) signal 3) Analog signal DTS: In this mode, only the digital input signal encoded with DTS is selected even if another signal is input at the same time. ANALOG (ANLG): In this mode, only the analog input signal is selected even if a digital signal is input at the same time. BASIC OPERATION Input mode PREPARATION Press INPUT MODE (or the input selector button that you have pressed to select the input source on the remote control) repeatedly until the desired input mode is shown on the display. • If the digital output data of the player has been processed in any way, you may not be able to perform DTS decoding even if you make a digital connection between this unit and the player. • If you play a source encoded with a DTS signal and set the input mode to ANALOG, this unit reproduces the noise of an unprocessed DTS signal. When you want to play a DTS source, be sure to connect the source to a digital input jack and set the input mode to AUTO or DTS. • If you switch the input mode to ANALOG while playing a source encoded with a DTS signal, this unit reproduces no sound. • The following phenomena may occur if the input mode is set to AUTO when playing back a source encoded with DTS: – If you continue to play a source encoded with a DTS signal, this unit automatically switches to the “DTSdecoding” mode to prevent noise from being generated during subsequent operation. (The “t” indicator lights up on the display.) The “t” indicator may flash immediately after playback of a source encoded with a DTS signal has finished. Only a source encoded with a DTS signal can be played back while this indicator is flashing. (The indicator will flash for less than a minute.) If you want to play a normal PCM source soon, set the input mode back to AUTO. – The “t” indicator may flash when a search or skip operation is performed. If this status continues for a certain length of time, the unit will automatically switch from the “DTS-decoding” mode to PCM digital signal input mode and the “t” indicator will go out. INTRODUCTION This unit comes with various input jacks. If your component is connected to more than one type of input jack, you can set the priority of the input signal. ■ Notes on playing a source encoded with a DTS signal Notes APPENDIX • If digital signals are input from both the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, the digital signal from the COAXIAL jack is selected. • When AUTO is selected, this unit automatically determines the type of signal. If this unit detects a Dolby Digital or DTS signal, the decoder automatically switches to the appropriate setting and reproduces 5.1 channel source. • The sound output may be interrupted for some LD players and DVD players in the following situation: When the input mode has been set to AUTO and a search is performed while playing the source encoded with a Dolby Digital or DTS signal, the sound may delay for a moment when playback is resumed. • Depending on the LD player, playback may not be made when playing an LD that is not digitally recorded with the input mode set to AUTO. If this happens, set the input mode to ANALOG. English 23 0104V520RDS21-25_EN 23 1/31/1, 4:22 PM PLAYING A SOURCE ■ On the front panel Selecting a DSP Program You can enhance your listening experience by selecting a DSP program. Refer to “SOUND FIELD PROGRAM” for details about each program. VOLUME D I G I T A L RDS MODE/FREQ EON D I G I TA L SURROUND STANDBY /ON PTY SEEK MODE START INPUT MODE y TREBLE BASS BALANCE PRESET /TUNING SPEAKERS A B 6CH INPUT FM/AM INPUT EFFECT PROGRAM PRESET/TUNING A/B/C/D/E EDIT • Make sure that the sound effect is turned on (see page 25). MEMORY – + – + L R ON OFF MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO PHONES ■ On the remote control S VIDEO SILENT VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL VIDEO AUX PROGRAM 1 / Press PROGRAM l or h repeatedly to select the desired program. The name of the selected program appears for a moment and the selected DSP program indicator lights up on the display. 2 1 TUNING MODE Press AMP(TUNER) on the component selector. DIGITAL PROGRAM MOVIE THEATER 1 BASS EXT. DSP 2 Press PRG+ or PRG– repeatedly to select the desired program. The name of the selected program appears for a moment and the selected DSP program indicator lights up on the display. DIGITAL DSP program name y • If desired, adjust the delay time and the sound output level of each speaker. (Refer to “DELAY TIME AND SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS” on page 40 for details.) Notes MOVIE THEATER 1 BASS EXT. DSP DSP program name • Choose a DSP program based on your listening preference, and not on the name of the program. The acoustics of your listening room affect the DSP program. Minimize the sound reflections in your room to maximize the effect created by the program. • When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the last DSP program used with that source. • When you set this unit in the standby mode, the current source and DSP program are memorized and are automatically selected when you turn on the power again. • If a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is input when the input mode is set to AUTO, the DSP program automatically switches to the appropriate decoding program. • When a monaural source is being played with PRO LOGIC/ NORMAL or PRO LOGIC/ENHANCED, no sound will be heard from the main speakers and the rear speakers. Sound can only be heard from the center speaker. However, if “CENTER SP” in the SET MENU is set to NON, the center channel sound is output from the main speakers. • When a source connected to the 6CH INPUT jack of this unit is selected, the digital sound field processor cannot be used. • When 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit, the DSP program cannot be selected. In this case, the sound is reproduced as normal 2-channel stereo. 24 0104V520RDS21-25_EN 24 1/31/1, 4:22 PM PLAYING A SOURCE ■ Virtual CINEMA DSP and SILENT CINEMA Press EFFECT to cancel the sound effect and monitor only the main sound. Press EFFECT again to turn the sound effect back on. EFFECT or The sound field processing is changed to the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode by setting “REAR LR SP” on the SET MENU to NON. Virtual CINEMA DSP is performed by using the main speakers. Front panel Remote control Notes SILENT CINEMA SILENT CINEMA allows you to enjoy the realistic feel of the DSP program while using headphones. This feature delivers powerful surround reproduction just as if listening through the speakers. ADVANCED OPERATION You can listen to SILENT CINEMA by connecting your headphones to the PHONES jack while the effect speakers are on. BASIC OPERATION • If the sound effect is canceled when Dolby Digital or DTS is decoding, the sounds of the center and rear channels are mixed and output from the main speakers. • If you turn off the sound effect when Dolby Digital or DTS is decoding, it may happen that the sound is output faintly or not output normally, depending on the source. In that case, turn back on the sound effect. PREPARATION Note • This unit is not set in the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode even if “REAR LR SP” is set to NON in the following cases: – when the 5CH STEREO, PRO LOGIC/NORMAL, DOLBY DIGITAL/NORMAL or DTS/NORMAL program is selected; – when the sound effect is turned off; – when 6CH INPUT is selected as the input source; – when 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit; – when the Dolby Digital KARAOKE source is played; – when using the test tone; or – when connecting the headphones (you will hear SILENT CINEMA). INTRODUCTION Virtual CINEMA DSP Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the sound field effects of the DSP program without rear speakers. Using YAMAHA original technology, natural surround reproduction is possible through the generation of a virtual speaker. Canceling the Sound Effect (turning off the effect speakers) APPENDIX English 25 0104V520RDS21-25_EN 25 1/31/1, 4:22 PM TUNING Connecting the Antennas Both AM and FM indoor antennas are included with this unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient signal strength. Connect each antenna correctly to the designated terminals. AM loop antenna (included) 3 Release the tab to lock the lead wires. Lightly pull the lead wires to confirm a good connection. 4 5 Attach the loop antenna to the antenna stand. Indoor FM antenna (included) Orient the AM loop antenna so that the best reception is obtained. y TUNER AM ANT GND • The AM loop antenna can be removed from the stand and attached to a wall, etc. FM ANT 75 UNBAL. Notes Ground (GND terminal) For maximum safety and minimum interference, connect the antenna GND terminal to a good earth ground. A good earth ground is a metal stake driven into moist earth. ■ Connecting the indoor FM antenna Connect the included indoor FM antenna to the FM ANT 75Ω UNBAL. terminal. • The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit. • The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit. A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality, an outdoor antenna may improve the quality. Consult the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center about the outdoor antennas. Connecting a coaxial cable to the included 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter (U.K. model only) 2 1 Note 11 (7/16) 8 (5/16) 6 (1/14) Cover • Do not connect an outdoor FM antenna and the indoor FM antenna at the same time. ■ Connecting the AM loop antenna 3 4 Cut the external sleeve of the 75-ohm coaxial cable and prepare it for connection. Open the cover of the included 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter. 3 1 2 Lead wire Cut the lead wire and remove it. 5 4 Clamp with pliers. Antenna stand 1 2 Press and hold the tab to unlock the terminal hole. Insert the AM loop antenna lead wires into the AM ANT and GND terminals. 5 Clamp with pliers. Insert the wire into the slot. Insert the cable wire into the slot, and clamp it with pliers. 26 0105V520RDS26-30_EN 26 Unit: mm (inch) 1/31/1, 4:22 PM Snap the cover into place. TUNING Automatic Tuning Manual Tuning Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and there is no interference. If the signal from the station you want to select is weak, you must tune in to it manually. Use INPUT l / h to select TUNER as input source. 2 Press FM/AM to select the reception band (FM or AM). “FM” or “AM” appears on the display. VOLUME INPUT D I G I T A L RDS MODE/FREQ EON D I G I TA L SURROUND STANDBY /ON PTY SEEK MODE START INPUT MODE BASS TREBLE BALANCE PRESET /TUNING SPEAKERS A B 6CH INPUT FM/AM INPUT EFFECT PROGRAM PRESET/TUNING A/B/C/D/E EDIT MEMORY – + – + L ON R TUNING MODE OFF MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R INTRODUCTION 1 OPTICAL FM/AM SILENT or VIDEO AUX 1 Use INPUT l / h to select TUNER as the input source. 32 1 3 INPUT Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) so that the “AUTO” indicator goes off. TUNING MODE Goes off AUTO/MAN'L MONO 2 If “ z ” appears on the display next to the band indication, press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn it off. Press FM/AM to select the reception band (FM or AM). “FM” or “AM” appears on the display. or EDIT 3 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) so that the “AUTO” indicator lights up on the display. TUNING MODE Turn “ z ” off 4 Press PRESET/TUNING l or h to tune in to the desired station. To continue the tuning search, hold down the button. PRESET/TUNING Lights up AUTO/MAN'L MONO Note • If you tune in manually to an FM station, it will be automatically received in monaural mode to increase the signal quality. PRESET /TUNING EDIT Turn “ z ” off APPENDIX Press PRESET/TUNING l once to tune in to a lower frequency and h once to tune in to a higher frequency. Press the button again if the tuning search does not stop at the desired station. ADVANCED OPERATION If “ z ” appears on the display next to the band indication, press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn it off. 4 BASIC OPERATION PRESET /TUNING FM/AM PREPARATION 4 PRESET/TUNING y English • Use the manual tuning method if the tuning search does not stop at the desired station (because the signal from the station is weak). • When tuned in to a station, the “TUNED” indicator lights up and the frequency of the received station is shown on the display. If an RDS station that offers the PS data service is being received, the station name is shown instead of the frequency on the display. 27 0105V520RDS26-30_EN 27 1/31/1, 4:22 PM TUNING ■ Automatic preset tuning options Automatic Preset Tuning (for RDS stations only) You can make use of the automatic preset tuning function for RDS stations only. This function enables the unit to automatically tune in with strong signals and to sequentially store up to 40 RDS stations (5 groups x 8 stations). VOLUME D I G I T A L RDS MODE/FREQ EON D I G I TA L SURROUND STANDBY /ON PTY SEEK MODE START INPUT MODE BASS TREBLE BALANCE PRESET /TUNING SPEAKERS A B 6CH INPUT ■ When automatic preset tuning is completed FM/AM INPUT EFFECT PROGRAM PRESET/TUNING A/B/C/D/E EDIT MEMORY – + – + L R ON TUNING MODE OFF MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO PHONES SILENT S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL VIDEO AUX The display shows the frequency of the last preset station. Check the contents and the number of preset stations by following the procedure in the section “To Recall a Preset Station” on page 29. 3 21 1 You can select the preset number from which the unit will store RDS stations and/or begin tuning toward lower frequencies. Before automatic preset tuning begins (after pressing MEMORY in step 3), 1. Press A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l or h to select the preset number with which the first station will be stored. The automatic preset tuning will stop when stations have all been stored up to E8. 2. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn “ z ” off and then press PRESET/TUNING l to begin tuning toward lower frequencies. Press FM/AM to select the FM band. Notes FM/AM 2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) so that the “AUTO” indicator lights up on the display. TUNING MODE Lights up AUTO/MAN'L MONO 3 Hold down MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) for about 3 seconds. The preset number, the “MEMORY” and “AUTO” indicators flash. After about 5 seconds, automatic preset tuning begins from the frequency currently displayed toward the higher frequencies. Received stations are sequentially stored as A1, A2 ... A8. If more than 8 stations have been tuned, they are stored as preset station numbers in other groups (B, C, D and E) in that order. MEMORY AUTO BASS EXT. MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM • A new setting can be stored in place of the former one. • The reception mode is stored along with the station frequency. • You can manually replace a preset station with another FM or AM station by simply using the manual preset tuning method. • Automatic preset tuning will be performed for all RDS network stations until all have been stored up to E8. Even if the number of received stations is not enough to be stored up to E8, automatic preset tuning is automatically ended after searching for all stations. • Only RDS stations with sufficient signal strength are stored by automatic preset tuning. If the station you want to store is weak in signal strength, tune in to it manually in monaural mode and store it by using the manual preset tuning method. (There may be a case that this unit cannot receive a station which could be received by using the automatic tuning method. This is because this unit receives a large amount of PI (Program Identification) data along with the station.) Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost when this unit is set in the standby mode. If, however, the power cord is disconnected from the AC power outlet or the power is cut for more than one week, the memory will be erased. If so, store the stations again by using preset tuning methods. Flashes 28 0105V520RDS26-30_EN 28 1/31/1, 4:22 PM TUNING Manual Preset Tuning To Recall a Preset Station You can also store up to 40 stations (5 groups x 8 stations) manually. RDS MODE/FREQ EON SURROUND PTY SEEK MODE START INPUT MODE BASS TREBLE BALANCE PRESET /TUNING SPEAKERS A B 6CH INPUT You can also recall a preset station with the remote control. Press AMP(TUNER) on the component selector and press TUNER on the input selector. FM/AM INPUT EFFECT PROGRAM PRESET/TUNING A/B/C/D/E EDIT MEMORY – + – + L R ON TUNING MODE VOLUME OFF MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R D I G I T A L OPTICAL RDS MODE/FREQ EON D I G I TA L SILENT SURROUND STANDBY /ON VIDEO AUX PTY SEEK MODE START INPUT MODE TREBLE BASS 4 3 2,5 2 BALANCE PRESET /TUNING SPEAKERS A 6CH INPUT FM/AM INPUT B EFFECT PROGRAM PRESET/TUNING A/B/C/D/E EDIT MEMORY – + – + L R ON TUNING MODE OFF MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO SILENT L AUDIO R OPTICAL PREPARATION 1 INTRODUCTION VOLUME D I G I T A L D I G I TA L STANDBY /ON You can recall any desired station simply by selecting the preset station number with which it was stored. VIDEO AUX Tune in to the desired station. Refer to “Automatic/Manual Tuning” for the tuning procedure. 2 1 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM). The “MEMORY” indicator flashes for about 5 seconds. MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM 3 Press A/B/C/D/E repeatedly to select the desired group (A to E) of preset stations before the “MEMORY” indicator goes off. Make sure that “ z ” appears on the display. The selected group appears on the display. 1 2 1 A/B/C/D/E Press A/B/C/D/E to select the required group of preset stations. Make sure that “ z ” appears on the display. 4 Press PRESET/TUNING l or h to select a preset station number (1 to 8) with which you want to store the station before the “MEMORY” indicator goes off. Press l to select a lower preset station number and h to select a higher preset station number. PRESET/TUNING 5 Front panel 2 Remote control Press PRESET/TUNING l or h (or PRESET –/+) to select a preset station number (1 to 8). The preset group and number appear on the display along with the reception band, frequency, and the “TUNED” indicator lights up. PRESET/TUNING or Front panel APPENDIX Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) before the “MEMORY” indicator goes off. The displayed station has been stored as the preset group and number you have selected, and the reception band and frequency appear and the “TUNED” indicator lights up on the display. or Remote control AUTO STEREO MEMORY ADVANCED OPERATION A/B/C/D/E BASIC OPERATION Flashes TUNED AUTO STEREO MAN'L/AUTO FM 6 TUNED Repeat steps 1 to 5 to store other stations. English Notes • A new setting can be stored in place of the former one. • The reception mode is stored along with the station frequency. 29 0105V520RDS26-30_EN 29 1/31/1, 4:22 PM TUNING Exchanging Preset Stations You can exchange the assignment of two preset stations with each other. Example: Exchange preset station “E1” with “A5” VOLUME D I G I T A L RDS MODE/FREQ EON D I G I TA L SURROUND STANDBY /ON PTY SEEK MODE START INPUT MODE BASS TREBLE BALANCE PRESET /TUNING SPEAKERS A 6CH INPUT FM/AM INPUT B EFFECT PROGRAM PRESET/TUNING A/B/C/D/E EDIT MEMORY – + – + L R ON TUNING MODE OFF MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO PHONES SILENT S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL VIDEO AUX 2,4 1 Recall preset station “E1”. Refer to the procedure in the section “To Recall a Preset Station” on page 29. 2 Hold down (PRESET/ TUNING) EDIT for about 3 second. “E1” and the “MEMORY” indicator flash. PRESET /TUNING EDIT BASS EXT. MEMORY Flashes 3 Recall preset station “A5” by using the buttons on the front panel. “A5” and the “MEMORY” indicator flash. BASS EXT. MEMORY Flashes 4 Press (PRESET/TUNING) EDIT again. The display shows the exchange of stations has been completed. PRESET /TUNING EDIT MEMORY 30 0105V520RDS26-30_EN 30 1/31/1, 4:23 PM RECEIVING RDS STATIONS RDS data contains various information such as PI (Program Identification), PS (Program Service name), PTY (Program Type), RT (Radio Text), CT (Clock Time), EON (Enhanced Other Networks), etc. The RDS function is carried out among the network stations. This unit can receive PI, PS, PTY, RT, CT, and EON data when receiving RDS broadcasting stations. ■ PS (Program Service name) mode: The name of the RDS station being received is displayed. The program type on the RDS station being received is displayed. There are 15 program types to classify RDS stations. You can make this unit search for a station which is broadcasting a program of the desired type. Refer to “PTY SEEK Function” for details. ■ RT (Radio Text) mode: • When an RDS station is being received, do not press RDS MODE/FREQ until one or more RDS mode indicators light up on the display. If you press the button before the indicators light up on the display, the mode cannot be changed. This is because the unit has not yet received all of the RDS data on the station. • RDS data not offered by the station cannot be selected. • The RDS data service cannot be utilized by this unit if the received signal is not strong enough. In particular, the RT mode requires a large amount of data to be received, so it is possible that the RT mode may not be displayed even if other RDS modes (PS, PTY, etc.) are displayed. • RDS data cannot sometimes be received under poor reception conditions. If so, press TUNING MODE so that the “AUTO” indicator goes off from the display. Although the reception mode is changed to monaural by this operation, when you change the display to RDS mode, RDS data may be displayed. • If the signal strength is weakened by external interference during the reception of an RDS station, the RDS data service may be cut off suddenly and “...WAIT” will appear on the display. RDS MODE/FREQ PS mode ■ CT (Clock Time) mode: PTY mode The current time is displayed and updated every minute. If the data are accidentally cut off, “CT WAIT” may appear. ■ EON (Enhanced Other Networks): ADVANCED OPERATION Information about the program (such as the title of the song, name of the singer, etc.) on the RDS station being received is displayed by a maximum of 64 alphanumeric characters, including the umlaut symbol. If other characters are used for RT data, they are displayed with under-bars. Notes BASIC OPERATION ■ PTY (Program Type) mode: The four modes are available in this unit for displaying RDS data. When an RDS station is being received, PS, PTY, RT and/or CT that correspond to the RDS data services offered by the station light up on the display. Press RDS MODE/ FREQ repeatedly to change the display mode among the RDS data offered by the transmitting station in the order shown below. Illumination of the red indicator next to the RDS mode indicator shows that the corresponding RDS mode is now selected. PREPARATION Description of RDS Data Changing the RDS Mode INTRODUCTION Radio Data System (RDS) is a data transmission system by FM stations in many countries. Stations using this system transmit an inaudible stream of data in addition to the normal radio signal. RT mode Refer to “EON Function” on page 33. APPENDIX CT mode Frequency display mode English 31 0106V520RDS31-34_EN 31 1/31/1, 4:23 PM RECEIVING RDS STATIONS ■ To cancel this function PTY SEEK Function Press PTY SEEK MODE twice. If you select the desired program type, the unit automatically searches all preset RDS stations that are broadcasting a program of the required type. 1 ■ Program types in the PTY mode There are 15 program types to classify RDS stations. 3 VOLUME D I G I T A L RDS MODE/FREQ EON D I G I TA L SURROUND STANDBY /ON PTY SEEK MODE START INPUT MODE TREBLE BASS BALANCE PRESET /TUNING SPEAKERS A B 6CH INPUT FM/AM INPUT EFFECT PROGRAM PRESET/TUNING A/B/C/D/E EDIT MEMORY – + – + L R ON TUNING MODE OFF MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO PHONES SILENT S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL VIDEO AUX 2 1 Press PTY SEEK MODE to set the unit in the PTY SEEK mode. The program type of the station being received or “NEWS” flashes on the display. NEWS AFFAIRS INFO SPORT EDUCATE DRAMA CULTURE SCIENCE VARIED POP M ROCK M M.O.R. M LIGHT M CLASSICS OTHER M News Current affairs General information Sports Education Drama Culture Science Light entertainment Pops Rock Middle-of-the-road music (easy-listening) Light classics Serious classics Other music PTY SEEK MODE START Flashes 2 Press PRESET/TUNING l or h to select the desired program type. The selected program type flashes on the display. PRESET/TUNING Flashes 3 Press PTY SEEK START to begin searching all preset RDS stations. The selected program type flashes and the “PTY HOLD” indicator lights up on the display while searching for stations. Light up PS PTY SEEK MODE START PTY PTY HOLD RT CT AUTO BASS EXT. The selected program type flashes. • If a station that is broadcasting a program of the required type is found, the unit stops at that station. • If the called station is not the desired one, press PTY SEEK START again. The unit begins searching for another station that is broadcasting a program of the same type. 32 0106V520RDS31-34_EN 32 2/2/1, 5:35 PM RECEIVING RDS STATIONS 2 EON Function EON Lights up Note PS • This function can only be used when an RDS station that offers the EON data service is being received. When such a station is being received, the “EON” indicator lights up on the display. AB EON PTY SEEK MODE START TREBLE BALANCE PRESET /TUNING SPEAKERS A B Flashes PS 6CH INPUT FM/AM INPUT EFFECT PROGRAM PRESET/TUNING BASS EXT. A/B/C/D/E EDIT MEMORY + CT SURROUND INPUT MODE – AUTO STEREO RT EON TUNED – + L R ON PTY AUTO STEREO RT CT EON NEWS PREPARATION VOLUME D I G I T A L D I G I TA L STANDBY /ON BASS PTY NEWS • If a preset RDS station of the selected program type starts broadcasting, the unit will automatically switch from the program being currently received to that program. The program type name indicator flashes. 2 RDS MODE/FREQ BASS EXT. INTRODUCTION This function uses the EON data service on the RDS station network. If you simply select the desired program type (NEWS, INFO, AFFAIRS or SPORT), the unit automatically searches for all preset RDS stations that are scheduled to broadcast a program of the required type and switches from the station being currently received to the new station when the broadcasts starts. Press EON repeatedly to select the desired program type (NEWS, INFO, AFFAIRS or SPORT). The selected program type name indicator lights up on the display. TUNED TUNING MODE OFF MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO PHONES SILENT VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL VIDEO AUX Make sure that the “EON” indicator lights up on the display. If the “EON” indicator does not light up, tune in to another RDS station so that the “EON” indicator lights up. Lights up PS PTY RT TUNED PTY RT AUTO STEREO CT EON TUNED AB Press EON repeatedly until no program type name lights up on the display. AB ADVANCED OPERATION BASS EXT. PS BASS EXT. ■ To cancel this function AUTO STEREO CT EON • When broadcasting of the required program ends, the previously received station (or another program on the same station) is recalled. BASIC OPERATION 1 S VIDEO APPENDIX English 33 0106V520RDS31-34_EN 33 1/31/1, 4:23 PM RECORDING A SOURCE Recording adjustments and other operations are performed from the recording component. Refer to the instructions for these components. 1,4 VOLUME D I G I T A L RDS MODE/FREQ EON D I G I TA L SURROUND STANDBY /ON PTY SEEK MODE START INPUT MODE TREBLE BASS BALANCE PRESET /TUNING SPEAKERS A B 6CH INPUT FM/AM INPUT EFFECT PROGRAM PRESET/TUNING A/B/C/D/E EDIT MEMORY – + – + L R ON TUNING MODE OFF MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO SILENT L AUDIO R OPTICAL VIDEO AUX 2 4 Notes • Do a test recording before you start an actual recording. • When this unit is set in the standby mode, you cannot record between other components connected to this unit. • The DSP program and the setting of VOLUME, BASS, TREBLE and BALANCE have no effect on the material being recorded. • A source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks of this unit cannot be recorded. • Composite video and S video signals pass independently through this unit’s video circuits. Therefore, when recording or dubbing video signals, if your video source component is connected to provide only an S video (or only a composite video) signal, you can record only an S video (or only a composite video) signal by your VCR. • A given input source is not output on the same REC OUT channel. (For example, the signal input from VCR 1 IN is not output on VCR 1 OUT.) • Check the copyright laws in your country to record from records, CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright laws. If you play back a video source that uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals. 2 1 Set the volume at the minimum level. 2 Select the source you want to record. VOLUME Front panel INPUT or Front panel Remote control 3 Begin recording by the recording component connected to this unit. 4 Play the source and then turn up the volume to confirm the input source. ■ Special considerations when recording DTS software The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise being recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to record sources that have DTS signals recorded on them, the following considerations and adjustments need to be made. For DVDs and CDs encoded with DTS Only 2-channel analog audio signals may be recorded. Set the DVD player (or CD player) as described in the player’s operation instructions so that the audio signals are output from the player’s analog outputs. VOLUME or Front panel Remote control 34 0106V520RDS31-34_EN 34 1/31/1, 4:23 PM ADVANCED OPERATION SET MENU 1 Press AMP(TUNER) on the component selector. y 2 Press SET MENU to enter the SET MENU. 3 Press PRG– (or PRG+) repeatedly to select the item (1 to 9) you want to adjust. INTRODUCTION The SET MENU consists of 9 items including the speaker mode setting. Use the SET MENU to enjoy the optimum audio/video playback for your system. • You can adjust the items on the SET MENU while playing a source. 1 SPEAKER SET CENTER SP MAIN SP PREPARATION REAR LR SP BASS OUT MAIN LVL 2 HP TONE CTRL 3 I/O ASSIGN 4 INPUT MODE 5 DOLBY D. SET y • By pressing SET MENU repeatedly, you can select items in the same order as when pressing PRG–. Depending on the item, press PRG– (or PRG+) to select a sub item. ADVANCED OPERATION LFE LEVEL Press – or + once to enter the setup mode of the selected item. The last setting you adjusted appears on the display. BASIC OPERATION 4 D-RANGE 6 DTS SET 7 SP DLY TIME 8 DISPLAY SET 9 MEM. GUARD Adjusting the Items on the SET MENU Adjustment should be made with the remote control. 5 Press – or + repeatedly to change the setting of the item. 6 Press PRG– (or PRG+) repeatedly until the input source name appears to exit from the SET MENU. 1 APPENDIX 3,6 4,5 2 English Note • Some items require extra steps to change to the desired setting. 35 0107V520RDS35-42_EN 35 1/31/1, 4:23 PM SET MENU Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to power failure. However, if the power is cut for more than one week, the settings of the SET MENU you adjusted will return to the factory settings. If so, adjust the items again. 1 SPEAKER SET (speaker mode settings) Use this feature to select suitable output modes for your speaker configuration. Notes • When 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit, level adjustments in items “MAIN SP”, “BASS OUT” and “MAIN LVL” are possible, but those in items “CENTER SP” and “REAR LR SP” are not affected. • When 6CH INPUT is selected as the input source, level adjustments in items of “1 SPEAKER SET” are not affected (except “MAIN LVL”). ■ MAIN SP (main speaker mode) Choices: LARGE, SMALL Initial setting: LARGE LARGE Select this if you have large main speakers. The entire range of the left and right main channel signal is directed to the left and right main speakers. SMALL Select this if you have small main speakers. The lowfrequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the main channel are directed to the speakers selected with “BASS OUT”. Note • When you select MAIN for “BASS OUT”, the low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the main channel are directed to the main speakers even if you select SMALL for the main speaker mode. ■ REAR LR SP (rear speaker mode) Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NON (none) Initial setting: LRG ■ CENTER SP (center speaker mode) By adding a center speaker to your speaker configuration, the unit can provide good dialog localization for many listeners and superior synchronization of sound and images. Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NON (none) Initial setting: LRG LRG Select this if you have a large center speaker. The entire range of the center channel signal is directed to the center speaker. SML Select this if you have a small center speaker. The lowfrequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the center channel are directed to the speakers selected with “BASS OUT”. LRG Select this if you have large left and right rear speakers or if a rear subwoofer is connected to the rear speakers. The entire range of the rear channel signal is directed to the left and right rear speakers. SML Select this if you have small left and right rear speakers. The low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the rear channel are directed to the speakers selected with “BASS OUT”. NON Select this if you do not have rear speakers. y • This unit is set in the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode by selecting NON for “REAR LR SP”. NON Select this if you do not have a center speaker. All of the center channel signals are directed to the left and right main speakers. 36 0107V520RDS35-42_EN 36 1/31/1, 4:23 PM SET MENU ■ BASS OUT (bass out mode) LFE signals carry low-frequency effects when this unit decodes a Dolby Digital or DTS signal. Low-frequency signals are defined as 90 Hz and below. Use this feature to adjust the level of the bass and treble when you use your headphones. Control range (dB): –6 to +3 Initial setting: 0 dB for both BASS and TRBL (treble) dB SWFR Select this if you use a subwoofer. The LFE signals are directed to the subwoofer. BOTH Select this if you use a subwoofer and you want to mix the main channel low-frequency signals with the LFE signals. Notes 3 I/O ASSIGN It is possible to assign jacks according to the component to be used if this unit’s DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT jack settings (component names for terminals) differ from that component. This makes it possible to change the jack assignment and effectively connect more component. Once you assign, you can select that component with INPUT l / h (or the input selector buttons). ■ 3A (1) (for the OPTICAL OUTPUT jack) Initial setting: (1) MD/CD-R ■ MAIN LVL (main level mode) Choices: NORM (normal), –10 dB Initial setting: NORM ■ 3B (2) to (4) (for the OPTICAL INPUT jacks) ADVANCED OPERATION Change this setting if you cannot match the output level of the center and rear speakers with the main speakers because of the unusually high-efficiency performance of the main speakers. BASIC OPERATION • When playing a 2-channel source (CD, MD, tape, video cassette etc.), select BOTH position to direct low bass signals (below 90 Hz) to the SUBWOOFER jack. • When you select SMALL (SML) for items “CENTER SP”, “MAIN SP” and “REAR LR SP”, the low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) from those channels are added to the LFE and output to the subwoofer. dB PREPARATION MAIN Select this if you do not use a subwoofer. The LFE signals are directed to the main speakers. INTRODUCTION Choices: SWFR (subwoofer), MAIN, BOTH Initial setting: BOTH 2 HP TONE CTRL (headphone tone control) Initial settings: (2) MD/CD-R (3) DVD (4) D-TV/CBL NORM (normal) Normally select this setting. APPENDIX –10 dB Select this if you cannot match the output level of your effect speakers with that of your main speakers when using the test tone. This setting decreases the main speaker output level to about one-third of the normal level. English 37 0107V520RDS35-42_EN 37 1/31/1, 4:23 PM SET MENU ■ 3C (5) (for the COAXIAL INPUT jack) Initial setting: (5) CD ■ D-RANGE (dynamic range) Use this feature to adjust the dynamic range (the difference between the maximum level and the minimum level of sounds). Choices: MAX, STD (standard), MIN Initial setting: MAX Note • You cannot select an item more than once for the same type of jack. 4 INPUT MODE (initial input mode) MAX Output level Use this feature to designate the input mode when turning on the power of this unit with the source component connected to more than one type of input jacks. • Select MAX for feature films. • Select STD for general use. • Select MIN for listening to sources at an extremely low volume level. Choices: AUTO, LAST Initial setting: AUTO Dialog level Input level AUTO Select this to allow this unit to automatically detect the type of input signal and select the appropriate input mode. MIN LAST Select this to set this unit to automatically select the last input mode used for that source. Dialog level H-LEVEL CUT 0.0 1.0 1.0 Output level Output level STD Dialog level 0.0 L-LEVEL BST Input level Input level 5 DOLBY D. SET (Dolby Digital set) This setting is effective only when this unit decodes Dolby Digital signals. ■ LFE LEVEL Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE (lowfrequency effect) channel when playing back a Dolby Digital signal. The LFE signal carries the low-frequency special effect sound which is only added to certain scenes. Control value (dB): –20 to 0 Initial setting: 0 dB dB Notes • Adjust the LFE level according to the capacity of your subwoofer. • Normally, around –6 dB to –8 dB is most suitable for listening at home. Note • When you select MIN, the sound output may be faint because some Dolby Digital signals are not compatible with the minimum-level dynamic range. In this case, select MAX or STD. 6 DTS SET (DTS LFE level) This setting is effective only when this unit decodes DTS signals. Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE (lowfrequency effect) channel when playing back a DTS signal. The LFE signal carries the low-frequency special effect sound which is only added to certain scenes. Control range (dB): –10 to +10 Initial setting: 0 dB dB Note • Adjust the LFE level according to the capacity of your subwoofer. 38 0107V520RDS35-42_EN 38 1/31/1, 4:23 PM SET MENU 7 SP DLY TIME (center delay) You can adjust the brightness of the display. Control range : –4 to 0 Initial setting: 0 9 MEM. GUARD (memory guard) Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to the setting of the SET MENU and other settings on this unit. ms Choices: ON, OFF Initial setting: OFF PREPARATION Control range (ms): 0 to 5 Initial setting: 0 ms ■ DIMMER INTRODUCTION Use this feature to adjust the delay of the center channel sound. This feature works when this unit decodes a Dolby Digital or DTS signal. Ideally, the center speaker should be the same distance from the listening position as the left and right main speakers. However, in most home situations, the center speaker is placed in line with the main speakers. By delaying the sound from the center speaker, the apparent distance from the center speaker to the listening position can be adjusted to make it seem the same as the distance between the left and right main speakers to the listening position. Adjusting the delay time for the center speaker is especially important for giving depth to the dialog. 8 DISPLAY SET Center speaker image R C Select ON to protect the following features: • All SET MENU items • Center, rear speakers and subwoofer levels • Delay time adjusted by using TIME/LEVEL Notes RR RL y • Increasing the delay by 1 ms simulates moving the speaker about 30 cm (one foot) farther away from the actual position of the center speaker. ADVANCED OPERATION • When “9 MEM. GUARD” is set to ON, you cannot use the test tone. • When “9 MEM. GUARD” is set to ON, you cannot select any other SET MENU items. BASIC OPERATION C L APPENDIX English 39 0107V520RDS35-42_EN 39 1/31/1, 4:23 PM DELAY TIME AND SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS When using the digital sound field processor with the Dolby Pro Logic decoder, Dolby Digital decoder or DTS decoder, you can adjust the delay time between the main sound and sound effect, and each speaker’s output level as you wish. If desired, you can adjust the sound output level of each speaker even if it has already been adjusted in “ADJUSTING THE SPEAKER BALANCE” procedure. Delay Time You can adjust the time difference between the beginning of the sound from the main speakers and the beginning of the sound effect from the rear speakers. The larger the value, the later the sound effect is generated. The delay time can be individually adjusted to all DSP programs. Notes • Adding too much delay will cause an unnatural effect with some sources. • The sound is momentarily interrupted while adjusting the delay time. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Sound Output Level of the Center, Right Rear and Left Rear Speakers, and Subwoofer Program CONCERT HALL JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT DISCO 5CH STEREO GAME TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE 70 mm SPECTACLE DGTL SPECTACLE DTS SPECTACLE 70 mm SCI-FI DGTL SCI-FI DTS SCI-FI 70 mm ADVENTURE DGTL ADVENTURE DTS ADVENTURE 70 mm GENERAL DGTL GENERAL DTS GENERAL PRO LOGIC/NORMAL DOLBY DIGITAL/NORMAL DTS DIGITAL SUR./NORMAL PRO LOGIC/ENHANCED DOLBY DIGITAL/ENHANCED DTS DIGITAL SUR./ENHANCED Preset value (ms) 45 30 15 26 2 36 10 69 23 13 13 20 16 16 20 15 15 20 15 15 20 5 5 20 5 5 Notes • If “CENTER SP” in the SET MENU is set to the NON position, the sound output level of the center speaker cannot be adjusted. This is because the center channel sound is automatically output from the right and left main speakers. • Once the sound output level has been adjusted, the level will be the same for all DSP programs. Speaker Center Right rear Left rear Subwoofer 40 0107V520RDS35-42_EN 40 2/2/1, 5:37 PM Preset value (dB) 0 0 0 0 DELAY TIME AND SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS Adjusting Method Press – or + to adjust the delay time or speaker output levels. 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust the settings of any other item. Adjustments should be performed with the remote control while watching the information on the display. 1 Notes 3 2 2 Press TIME/LEVEL repeatedly to select the item you want to adjust. Each time you press TIME/LEVEL, the selected item changes and appears on the display as below. DELAY Delay time Center speaker output level R SUR. Right rear speaker output level L SUR. Left rear speaker output level SWFR ADVANCED OPERATION CENTER Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost when this unit is set in the standby mode. If, however, the power cord is disconnected from the AC power outlet or the power is cut for more than one week, the latest values for the delay time and the center/rear/ subwoofer output levels that were set will automatically return to the preset values. If so, adjust the delay time and output levels again. BASIC OPERATION Press AMP(TUNER) on the component selector. PREPARATION 1 • If “CENTER SP” or “REAR LR SP” is set to NON, or “BASS OUT” is set to MAIN, the output level of that speaker cannot be adjusted. • When you adjust the output level with TIME/LEVEL, the settings you made with the test tone will be changed. • To adjust speakers other than the subwoofer, the adjusting procedure using test tones on page 19 is recommended. INTRODUCTION 3 Subwoofer output level Note • Depending on the setting of the SET MENU, you may not be able to select all these items. APPENDIX English 41 0107V520RDS35-42_EN 41 1/31/1, 4:23 PM SLEEP TIMER The SLEEP timer can be used to automatically set this unit in the standby mode. This timer is useful when you are going to sleep while enjoying a broadcast or other desired input source. The SLEEP timer can only be set with the remote control. Notes • First press AMP(TUNER), TAPE/MD, CD or DVD/LD on the component selector to set the SLEEP timer for this unit. • The SLEEP timer is effective for the components connected to the AC OUTLET(S) on the rear panel of this unit. Canceling the SLEEP Timer Press SLEEP repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF” appears on the display. It will soon disappear and the “SLEEP” indicator will go off. Note Setting the SLEEP Timer 1 Play a source you want to enjoy when you are going to sleep. 2 Press SLEEP repeatedly to select the desired SLEEP time. Each time you press SLEEP, the SLEEP time will change as below: 120 90 60 • The SLEEP timer can also be canceled by setting the unit in the standby mode by using POWER on the remote control (or STANDBY/ON), or by disconnecting the AC power cord from the AC power outlet. 30 The SLEEP timer is off (SLEEP OFF). (This is the state before SLEEP is pressed.) BASS EXT. SLEEP Flashes 3 The “SLEEP” indicator soon lights up on the display after the SLEEP timer has been set. The display returns to the previous indication. STEREO TUNED SLEEP Lights up 42 0107V520RDS35-42_EN 42 1/31/1, 4:23 PM PRESET REMOTE CONTROL Note • For the notes on batteries, operating distance and names and functions of the remote control, refer to each description in this manual. Component Selector Buttons TAPE/MD The code for a YAMAHA MD deck is factory set. (The code for the YAMAHA CD recorder and tape deck can also be set.) VCR A VCR can be controlled. TV A TV can be controlled. CBL/SAT A cable TV or satellite tuner can be controlled. Notes • The button functions on the remote control differ depending on the operation mode. Refer to the following pages for details. • When shipped from the factory, the YAMAHA manufacturer codes listed on page 49 are set for each dial position. If unable to operate your YAMAHA A/V component, please try using another YAMAHA code. Turn on the power. 4 Press CD on the input selector. 5 Press CD on the component selector. 6 Press p. Refer to “Description of Each Mode” for the CD player operation buttons. 7 Adjust the volume. ■ Example: To control YAMAHA CD player 5 2 3 4 7 6 Make sure that the volume is set at the minimum level. 2 Press AMP(TUNER) on the component selector. If you set the remote control with the manufacturer codes listed from page i at the end of this manual, you can control other brands of components. Refer to “Setting the Manufacturer Code” for details. 43 0108V520RDS43-49_EN 43 1/31/1, 4:23 PM English 1 APPENDIX 3 ADVANCED OPERATION Controlling the Components Connected to This Unit BASIC OPERATION AMP(TUNER) You can perform the basic operations of this unit. CD The code for a YAMAHA CD player is factory set. DVD/LD & DVD MENU An LD player can be controlled in the DVD/LD mode. A DVD player can be controlled in the DVD/LD and DVD MENU modes. The code for a YAMAHA DVD player is factory set. PREPARATION There are eight component selector buttons. Press one of these buttons which corresponds to the component you want to control with the remote control. For example, if you press CD on the component selector, the remote control is set to the CD operation mode, allowing the CD player to be controlled. INTRODUCTION It is possible to control this unit and other YAMAHA A/V components using the remote control supplied with this unit. It is also possible to control components from other manufacturers (or some YAMAHA components) by setting the proper manufacturer code (a signal assigned to each manufacturer and component). PRESET REMOTE CONTROL Description of Each Mode ■ TAPE/MD MODE Note • TV VOLUME functions if you have set the code for your TV. Press TAPE/MD. POWER This button turns this unit on if you have set the code for a YAMAHA tape deck, MD recorder or CD recorder. This button turns on the tape deck, MD recorder or CD recorder that has a remote control with a power button if you have set the code. Input selector buttons 6CH INPUT EFFECT VOLUME MUTE SLEEP r REC/PAUSE This button gives a pause in recording on a tape deck or MD recorder. p PLAY This button plays a tape, an MD or CD-R. b DIR A (TAPE) This button selects the playing direction of deck A. SKIP– (MD/CD-R) This button skips to the previous track. w REWIND (TAPE) This button rewinds a tape. SEARCH (MD/CD-R) This button initiates a backward search on the track that is playing to find the point from which you want to listen. TV VOLUME DISPLAY (MD/CD-R) DECK A/B (TAPE) This button selects deck A or B on a double-cassette tape deck. e PAUSE (MD/CD-R) This button gives a pause in operation. a DIR B (TAPE) This button selects the playing direction of deck B. SKIP+ (MD/CD-R) This button skips to the next track. s STOP This button stops operation on a tape deck, MD recorder or CD recorder. f FAST FORWARD (TAPE) This button winds a tape fast forward. SEARCH (MD/CD-R) This button initiates a fast-forward search on the track that is playing to find the point from which you want to listen. • The dark-shaded buttons do not function even if you have set up the manufacturer code. • Some of them may not function depending on the component you have. In this case, use the original remote control supplied with your component. 44 0108V520RDS43-49_EN 44 1/31/1, 4:23 PM PRESET REMOTE CONTROL ■ CD MODE Note • TV VOLUME and TV INPUT function if you have set the code for your TV. INTRODUCTION Press CD. PREPARATION POWER This button turns this unit on if you have set the code for a YAMAHA CD player. This button turns on the CD player that has a remote control with a power button if you have set the code. Input selector buttons 6CH INPUT BASIC OPERATION EFFECT DISC SKIP –/+ (for a CD player with CD changer) These buttons skip to the next or previous CD. VOLUME MUTE y TV VOLUME PAUSE/STOP function SLEEP p PLAY This button plays a CD. b SKIP– This button skips to the beginning of the previous track. w SEARCH This button initiates a backward search on the track that is playing to find the point from which you want to listen. DISPLAY TV INPUT English • The dark-shaded buttons do not function even if you have set up the manufacturer code. • Some of them may not function depending on the component you have. In this case, use the original remote control supplied with your component. 45 0108V520RDS43-49_EN 45 1/31/1, 4:23 PM APPENDIX e PAUSE This button gives a pause in operation. The button functions as PAUSE/STOP* for operating a YAMAHA CD player under factory setting. a SKIP+ This button skips to the beginning of the next track. s STOP This button stops operation. The button functions as PAUSE/STOP* for operating YAMAHA CD players. f SEARCH This button initiates a fast-forward search on the track that is playing to find the point from which you want to listen. ADVANCED OPERATION Press the button once to give a pause in operation and press once more to stop operation. PRESET REMOTE CONTROL ■ DVD/LD MODE Note • TV VOLUME and TV INPUT function if you have set the code for your TV. Press DVD/LD. POWER This button turns this unit on if you have set the code for a YAMAHA DVD or LD player. This button turns on the DVD or LD player that has a remote control with a power button if you have set the code. Input selector buttons 6CH INPUT EFFECT DISC SKIP –/+ VOLUME MUTE SLEEP PAUSE SKIP – STOP TV VOLUME DISPLAY TV INPUT SKIP + PLAY SEARCH SEARCH ■ DVD MENU MODE Notes • TV VOLUME and TV INPUT function if you have set the code for your TV. • DVD MENU operations cannot be performed for some DVD players. Press DVD MENU. POWER This button turns this unit on if you have set the code for a YAMAHA DVD or LD player. This button turns on the DVD or LD player that has a remote control with a power button if you have set the code. Numeric buttons CLEAR +10 DISC SKIP –/+ VOLUME MUTE RETURN MENU UP MENU LEFT MENU DOWN TV VOLUME INDEX TV INPUT MENU RIGHT MENU SELECT MENU TITLE • The dark-shaded buttons do not function even if you have set up the manufacturer code. • Some of them may not function depending on the component you have. In this case, use the original remote control supplied with your component. 46 0108V520RDS43-49_EN 46 1/31/1, 4:24 PM PRESET REMOTE CONTROL ■ VCR MODE ■ CBL/SAT MODE Note Note • TV VOLUME, TV INPUT and TV SLEEP function if you have set the code for your TV. Press VCR. INTRODUCTION VCR POWER • TV VOLUME, TV INPUT and TV SLEEP function if you have set the code for your TV. CBL/SAT POWER Press CBL/SAT. CHANNEL VCR CHANNEL –/+ VOLUME MUTE TV VOLUME DISPLAY TV INPUT VCR PAUSE TV SLEEP VCR REC Press this button twice to start recording. CBL/SAT CHANNEL –/+ VOLUME MUTE TV INPUT MENU UP MENU RIGHT MENU SELECT MENU MENU DOWN BASIC OPERATION VCR REWIND TV VOLUME DISPLAY TV SLEEP MENU LEFT VCR PLAY VCR FAST FORWARD VCR STOP +100 CHANNEL ENTER PREPARATION EFFECT CHANNEL ENTER CHANNEL RECALL ■ TV MODE Note • You can control your VCR if you have set the code for it. ADVANCED OPERATION TV POWER Press TV. CHANNEL TV CHANNEL –/+ VOLUME TV MUTE TV SLEEP VCR STOP VCR REWIND TV VOLUME DISPLAY TV INPUT VCR PAUSE APPENDIX VCR REC Press this button twice. EFFECT CHANNEL ENTER VCR PLAY VCR FAST FORWARD English • The dark-shaded buttons do not function even if you have set up the manufacturer code. • Some of them may not function depending on the component you have. In this case, use the original remote control supplied with your component. 47 0108V520RDS43-49_EN 47 1/31/1, 4:24 PM PRESET REMOTE CONTROL Setting the Manufacturer Code You can set the code for the manufacturer of your component after pressing the component selector buttons other than AMP(TUNER). 1 2 Turn on your component to be used. Press one of the component selector buttons which corresponds to the component to be controlled. ■ To use a second (and third) VCR You can control a second (and third) VCR in the CBL/SAT and DVD MENU modes if a cable TV or satellite tuner, or DVD player is not being used. Note • In order to set a second (and third) VCR in the DVD MENU mode, it is necessary to first set up the code for an LD player in the DVD/LD mode. 1 2 Turn on the VCR to be used. Press CBL/SAT or DVD MENU on the component selector. 3 Press both VOLUME buttons (u/d) at the same time for about four seconds. The indicator flashes twice. 3 Press both VOLUME buttons (u/d) at the same time for about four seconds. The indicator flashes twice. 4 Use the numeric buttons to enter the four-digit manufacturer code for the component to be used. Make sure that the indicator flashes twice. If the indicator does not flash, repeat step 3 and re-enter the code. 4 Use the numeric buttons to enter the four-digit code for the second (and third) VCR. Make sure that the indicator flashes twice. If the indicator does not flash, repeat step 3 and re-enter the code. 5 Press POWER (or any other button) on the remote control to check if you have set the code correctly. If your component cannot be controlled with the remote control, try setting another code for the same manufacturer. 5 Press POWER (or any other button) on the remote control to check if you have set the code correctly. If the VCR cannot be controlled with the remote control, try setting another code for the same manufacturer. Notes • You can set only one code for one mode. • In the DVD/LD and DVD MENU modes: Be sure to press DVD/LD on the component selector before entering the code for the DVD/LD player. You cannot set the code for a DVD player after pressing DVD MENU on the component selector. The code set in the DVD/LD mode is also simultaneously set in the DVD MENU mode. • If your component does not respond to any of the codes listed for the manufacturer, use the original remote control supplied with your component. 48 0108V520RDS43-49_EN 48 1/31/1, 4:24 PM PRESET REMOTE CONTROL ■ To return to the factory-set codes in each mode Returning to the Factory Setting Press one of the component selector buttons other than AMP(TUNER). 2 Press both VOLUME buttons (u/d) at the same time for about four seconds. The indicator flashes twice. 3 Enter the code number “9990”. Make sure that the indicator flashes twice. Press one of the component selector buttons which corresponds to the component to be returned to the factory-set code. 2 Press both VOLUME buttons (u/d) at the same time for about four seconds. The indicator flashes twice. 3 Enter the code number “0000”. Make sure that the indicator flashes twice. PREPARATION 1 1 INTRODUCTION ■ To return to the factory-set codes in all modes BASIC OPERATION The following codes are factory set. Component Code TV CBL/SAT VCR DVD/LD CD TAPE/MD TV Cable TV VCR DVD player CD player MD recorder 0101 0006 0002 0008 (YAMAHA DVD player) 0005 (YAMAHA CD player) 0024 (YAMAHA MD recorder) Set component Set code ADVANCED OPERATION Component selector button We recommend that you write all the code numbers you have set on the table above. APPENDIX English 49 0108V520RDS43-49_EN 49 1/31/1, 4:24 PM SOUND FIELD PROGRAM A digital sound field processor (DSP) based on the latest YAMAHA technology is built into this unit. It is possible to play back various sound fields for the source you are listening to. Note • Regardless of the program name and characteristics listed in the table below, select the sound field program that sounds best to you. Hi-Fi DSP Programs ■ For audio sources: Nos. 1 to 4 No. Program (group) Sub-program Features 1 CONCERT HALL — A large round concert hall with a rich surround effect. Pronounced reflections from all directions emphasize the extension of sounds. The sound field has a great deal of presence, and your virtual seat is near the center, close to the stage. 2 JAZZ CLUB — This is the sound field at stage front in “The Bottom Line”, a famous New York jazz club. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering a real and vibrant sound. 3 ROCK CONCERT — The ideal program for lively, dynamic rock music. The data for this program was recorded at LA’s “hottest” rock club. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center-left of the hall. 4 ENTERTAINMENT DISCO This program recreates the acoustic environment of a lively disco in the heart of a big city. The sound is dense and highly concentrated. It is also characterized by a highenergy, “immediate” sound. 5CH STEREO Using this program increases the listening position range. This is a sound field suitable for background music at parties. Note • Reverberations (sound effects) for realizing the sound field and unprocessed stereo from the left and right main speakers is output. The sound is not output from the center speaker. (The sound is output when one of these programs is selected while playing a source encoded with a Dolby Digital or DTS signal. If 5CH STEREO is selected, the sound is output from all speakers regardless of the input source.) CINEMA DSP Programs ■ For audio-video sources: Nos. 4 to 6 No. Program (group) Sub-program GAME Features 4 ENTERTAINMENT 5 TV SPORTS — Although the presence sound field is relatively narrow, the surround sound field employs the sound environment of a large concert hall. With this program, you can enjoy watching various TV programs such as news, variety shows, music programs or sports programs. In a stereo broadcast of a sports game, the commentator is oriented at the center position, and the shouts and the atmosphere in the stadium spread on the surround side, while their spread to the rear is properly restrained. 6 MONO MOVIE — This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources (such as old movies). The program produces the optimum reverberation to create sound depth by using only the presence sound field. This program adds a deep and spatial feeling to video game sounds. 50 0109V520RDS50-52_EN 50 1/31/1, 4:24 PM SOUND FIELD PROGRAM ■ For movie programs: Nos. 7 to 9 No. 7 Program (group) Sub-program MOVIE THEATER 1 SPECTACLE Input source Analog, PCM, Dolby Digital in 2-channel DGTL SPECTACLE Dolby Digital (5.1-channel) DTS SPECTACLE DTS SCI-FI Analog, PCM, Dolby Digital in 2-channel DGTL SCI-FI Dolby Digital (5.1-channel) DTS SCI-FI DTS MOVIE THEATER 2 ADVENTURE 70 mm ADVENTURE Analog, PCM, Dolby Digital in 2-channel DGTL ADVENTURE Dolby Digital (5.1-channel) This program clearly reproduces dialog and sound effects in the latest sound form of science fiction films, thus creating a broad and expansive cinematic space amid the silence. You can enjoy science fiction films in a virtual-space sound field that includes Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital and DTS-encoded software employing the most advanced techniques. This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of the newest 70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films. The sound field is made to be similar to that of the newest movie theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field itself are restrained as much as possible. GENERAL q/DTS SURROUND NORMAL DGTL GENERAL Dolby Digital (5.1-channel) DTS GENERAL DTS PRO LOGIC/ NORMAL Analog, PCM, Dolby Digital in 2-channel DOLBY DIGITAL/ Dolby Digital NORMAL (5.1-channel) ENHANCED DTS DIGITAL SUR./NORMAL DTS PRO LOGIC/ ENHANCED Analog, PCM, Dolby Digital in 2-channel DTS DIGITAL SUR./ ENHANCED DTS The built-in decoder precisely reproduces sounds and sound effects from sources. The highly efficient decoding process improves crosstalk and channel separation, and makes sound positioning smoother and more precise. In this program, the digital sound field processor is not turned on. This program ideally simulates the multi-surround speaker systems of the 35-mm film theaters. Dolby Pro Logic decoding, Dolby Digital decoding or DTS decoding and digital sound field processing create precise effects without altering the original sound orientation. The surround effects produced by this sound field wrap around the viewer naturally from the back to the left and right, and toward the screen. APPENDIX DOLBY DIGITAL/ Dolby Digital ENHANCED (5.1-channel) This program is for reproducing sounds from 70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films, and is characterized by a soft and extensive sound field. The presence sound field is relatively narrow. It spatially spreads all around and toward the screen, restraining the echo effect of conversations without losing clarity. For the surround sound field, the harmony of music or chorus sounds beautifully in a wide space at the rear of the sound field. ADVANCED OPERATION 9 70 mm GENERAL Analog, PCM, Dolby Digital in 2-channel BASIC OPERATION DTS ADVENTURE DTS PREPARATION 8 70 mm SCI-FI This program creates the extremely wide sound field of a 70-mm movie theater. It precisely reproduces the source sound in detail, making both the video and the sound field incredibly real. This is ideal for any kind of video source encoded with Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS (especially large-scale movie productions). INTRODUCTION 70 mm SPECTACLE Features Notes 51 0109V520RDS50-52_EN 51 1/31/1, 4:24 PM English • The “ x ” indicator does not light up when selecting the sub-program “NORMAL” of the q/DTS SURROUND program. • If “CENTER SP” in the SET MENU is set to NON, no sound is output from the center speaker. • The effect sound is output from the main speakers when a monaural source is played with CINEMA DSP program groups 4 (GAME) and 5 to 8. SOUND FIELD PROGRAM ■ MOVIE THEATER 1 and 2 Most commercially available movie software has 4-channel (left, center, right and surround) sound information encoded by Dolby Surround matrix processing and stored on the left and right tracks. These signals are processed by the Dolby Pro Logic decoder. The MOVIE THEATER programs are designed to recreate the spaciousness and delicate nuances of sound that tend to be lost in the encoding and decoding processes. The 6-channel soundtracks found on 70-mm film produce precise sound field localization and rich, deep sound without using matrix processing. This unit’s MOVIE THEATER 70 mm programs provide the same quality of sound and sound localization that 6-channel soundtracks do. When the input source is analog, PCM or encoded with Dolby Digital in 2-channel These programs express an immense sound field and a large surround effect. They also give depth to the sound from the Presence DSP sound field main speakers to recreate the realistic sound of a Dolby Stereo theater. 70 mm SPECTACLE 70 mm SCI-FI 70 mm ADVENTURE Surround DSP 70 mm GENERAL sound field The built-in Dolby Digital or DTS decoder brings the professional-quality sound designed for movie theaters into your home. With the unit’s MOVIE THEATER programs, you can recreate a dynamic sound that gives you the feeling of being at a public theater in your listening room by using Dolby Digital or DTS technology. When the input source is encoded with Dolby Digital (5.1-channel) or DTS (Tri-Field CINEMA DSP) These programs use YAMAHA’s tri-field DSP processing on each of the Dolby Digital or DTS signals for the front, left surround and right surround channels. This processing enables this unit to reproduce the immense sound field and surround expression of a Dolby Digital- or DTS-equipped movie theater Presence DSP sound field without sacrificing the clear separation of all channels. DGTL SPECTACLE DTS SPECTACLE DGTL SCI-FI DTS SCI-FI DGTL ADVENTURE Left surround DSP Right surround DSP DTS ADVENTURE sound field sound field DGTL GENERAL DTS GENERAL y • If a Dolby Digital signal or DTS signal is input when the input mode is set to AUTO, the DSP program will be automatically switched to the Dolby Digital playback sound field or DTS playback sound field. 52 0109V520RDS50-52_EN 52 1/31/1, 4:24 PM APPENDIX TROUBLESHOOTING ■ General Problem No sound and/or no picture. Remedy Refer to page The power cord is not connected or the plug is not completely inserted. Firmly connect the power cord. 18 The IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch on the rear panel is not fully set to the left or right position. Set the switch fully to the left or right position when the unit is in the standby mode. 18 The protection circuit has been activated. Make sure all speaker wire connections on this unit and on all speakers are secure and that the wire for each connection does not touch anything other than its respective connection. 16, 17 Incorrect input or output cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 12 – 15 An appropriate input source has not been selected. Select an appropriate input source with INPUT l / h or 6CH INPUT (or the input selector buttons). The speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections. The main speakers to be used have not been selected properly. Select the main speakers with SPEAKERS A and/or B. 21 The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume. 22 The sound is muted. Press MUTE or any operation buttons to cancel a mute and adjust the volume. Play a source whose signals this unit can reproduce. 22 14, 15 21 16, 17 — Make connections using the same type of jack (between composites, S-VIDEOs, or components) for both the input and output. The sound suddenly goes off. The protection circuit has been activated because of a short circuit, etc. Check the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch is set to the appropriate position and then turn the unit back on. 18 Check the speaker wires are not touching each other and then turn the unit back on. 16, 17 The sleep timer has functioned. Turn on the power, and play the source again. 42 The sound is muted. Press MUTE or any operation buttons to cancel a mute and adjust the volume. 22 Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. Only the speaker on one side can be heard. 12 – 17 APPENDIX The output and input for the video are connected to different types of video jacks. ADVANCED OPERATION The picture does not appear. BASIC OPERATION Digital signals other than PCM audio, Dolby Digital or DTS signal which this unit cannot reproduce are being input to this unit by playing a CD-ROM, etc. PREPARATION The unit fails to turn on when STANDBY/ON (or POWER) is pressed, or enters in the standby mode soon after the power has been turned on. Cause INTRODUCTION Refer to the chart below when the unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instruction below does not help, set this unit in the standby mode, disconnect the power cord and contact the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center. English 53 0110V520RDS53-62_EN 53 1/31/1, 4:24 PM TROUBLESHOOTING Problem No sound from the effect speakers. Cause Remedy The sound effect is off. Press EFFECT to turn it on. 25 A Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS decoding DSP program is being used with material not encoded with Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS. Select another DSP program. 50, 51 A 96-kHz sampling digital signal is being input to this unit. No sound from the center speaker. 22 The output level of the center speaker is set to minimum. Raise the level of the center speaker. 40 “CENTER SP” in the SET MENU is set to NON. Select the appropriate mode for your center speaker. 36 One of the Hi-Fi DSP programs (1 to 4) has been selected. Select another DSP program. The source encoded with a Dolby Digital or DTS signal does not have a center channel signal. No sound from the rear speakers. No sound from the subwoofer. A “humming” sound can be heard. The output level of the rear speakers is set to minimum. Raise the output level of the rear speakers. A monaural source is being played with the program 9. Select another DSP program. “BASS OUT” in the SET MENU is set to MAIN when a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is being played. Select SWFR or BOTH. 37 “BASS OUT” in the SET MENU is set to SWFR or MAIN when a 2-channel source is being played. Select BOTH. 37 40 50, 51 — 37 “BASS OUT” in the SET MENU is set to SWFR or BOTH and your system does not include a subwoofer. Select MAIN. The output mode for each speaker (main, center or rear) in the SET MENU does not match your speaker configuration. Select the appropriate output mode for each speaker based on the size of the speakers in your configuration. 36, 37 Incorrect cable connections. Firmly connect the audio plugs. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 12 – 15 54 0110V520RDS53-62_EN 50, 51 — The source does not contain low bass signals (90 Hz and below). Poor bass reproduction. Refer to page 54 1/31/1, 4:24 PM TROUBLESHOOTING Problem Cause Remedy Turn on the power to the component. Refer to page The volume level cannot be increased, or the sound is distorted. The effect and surround sounds cannot be recorded. The component connected to the REC OUT jacks of this unit is turned off. A source cannot be recorded by a digital recording component connected to the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack of this unit. A source component is only connected to the analog input jacks of this unit. Connect the source component to the digital input jacks of this unit. The settings of the SET MENU and some other settings on this unit cannot be changed. “9 MEM. GUARD” in the SET MENU is set to ON. Select OFF. 39 This unit does not operate properly. The internal microcomputer has been frozen by an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or by a power supply with low voltage. Disconnect the AC power cord from the outlet and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds. — The sound is degraded when listening with headphones connected to a tape deck or CD player that is connected to this unit. This unit is in the standby mode. Turn on the power of the unit. — There is noise interference from digital or high-frequency equipment, or the unit. The unit is too close to the digital or highfrequency equipment. Move the unit further away from such equipment. — — 12 – 15 INTRODUCTION 34 It is not possible to record the effect and surround sounds by a recording component. PREPARATION BASIC OPERATION ADVANCED OPERATION APPENDIX English 55 0110V520RDS53-62_EN 55 1/31/1, 4:24 PM TROUBLESHOOTING ■ Tuner Problem Cause The characteristics of FM stereo broadcasts may cause this problem when the transmitter is too far away or the antenna input is poor. FM stereo reception is noisy. There is distortion, and clear reception cannot be obtained even with a good FM FM antenna. There is multipath interference. The desired station cannot be tuned in with the automatic tuning method. The station is too weak. Previously preset stations can no longer be tuned in. The desired station cannot be tuned in with the automatic tuning method. There are continuous crackling and hissing AM noises. Remedy Check the antenna connections. Try using a high-quality directional FM antenna. Use the manual tuning method. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate multipath interference. Refer to page 26 27 26 Use the manual tuning method. 27 Use a high-quality directional FM antenna. 26 The unit has been disconnected for a long period. Re-store the stations. 28 The signal is weak or the antenna connections are loose. Tighten the AM loop antenna connections and orient it for best reception. 26 Use the manual tuning method. 27 Noises result from lightning, fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats and other electrical equipment. Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire. This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to eliminate all noise. 26 A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV. — There are buzzing and whining noises (especially in the evening). ■ Remote control Problem The remote control does not work nor function properly. The unit or other component cannot be controlled. Cause Remedy Refer to page Wrong distance or angle. The remote control will function within a maximum range of 6 m (20 feet) and no more than 30 degrees off-axis from the front panel. 7 Direct sunlight or lighting (from an inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is striking the remote control sensor of this unit. Reposition the unit. 7 The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries with new ones. 3 The component to be controlled has not been selected. Press one of the component selector buttons, corresponding to the component to be controlled. 43 The remote control cannot control system components. — The manufacturer code has not been set up properly. Enter the code again. Depending on the manufacturer or the model, some components cannot be controlled with this unit’s remote control even though the code has been set up properly. Use the original remote control supplied with your component. 48 Try setting another code for the same manufacturer. — After this unit has been exposed to a strong external electric shock (such as lightning and strong static electricity) or if you mishandle the operation of this unit, it may not function properly. In these cases, set this unit in the standby mode, disconnect the power cord, plug it back in after 30 seconds, and start operating. 56 0110V520RDS53-62_EN 56 1/31/1, 4:24 PM SPECIFICATIONS VIDEO SECTION • Minimum RMS Output Power for Main, Center, Rear 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 ohms ...................................... 70 W 1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 8 ohms ......................................................... 85 W • Video Signal Type .......................................................................... PAL • DIN Standard Output Power [Europe model only] 1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 ohms ....................................................... 105 W • IEC Output Power [Europe model only] 1 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 ohms ....................................................... 75 W • Composite Video Signal Level .................................... 1 Vp-p/75 ohms • S-Video Signal Level Y ............................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 ohms C ........................................................................ 0.286 Vp-p/75 ohms • Signal to Noise Ratio ...................................................... 50 dB or more • Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT) Composite, S-Video ...................................... 5 Hz to 10 MHz, –3 dB • Dynamic Power (IHF) 8/6/4/2 ohms ......................................................... 95/115/135/155 W FM SECTION • Damping Factor 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 ohms ................................................... 60 or more • Alternate Channel Selectivity (±400 kHz) ................................... 70 dB • Total Harmonic Distortion CD, etc. to Main L/R (Effect Off, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 35 W, 8 ohms) .................................................................................. 0.025% or less • Tuning Range ...................................................... 87.50 to 108.00 MHz • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF) Mono/Stereo ................................................................... 76 dB/70 dB • Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz) Mono/Stereo ...................................................................... 0.2%/0.3% • Stereo Separation (1 kHz) ............................................................ 48 dB • Frequency Response ............................ 20 Hz to 15 kHz, +0.5, –2.0 dB AM SECTION • Residual Noise (IHF-A Network) Main L/R ..................................................................... 150 µV or less • Usable Sensitivity .................................................................. 300 µV/m • Channel Separation CD, etc. to Main L/R (1 kHz) ...................................... 60 dB or more (10 kHz) .................................... 45 dB or more GENERAL • Phones Output (1 kHz, 150 mV, 8 ohms) ................. 490 mV/390 ohms • Maximum Input Signal CD, etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) ........................................ 2.2 V or more • Output Level REC OUT ............................................................. 150 mV/1.2 kohms SUBWOOFER ......................................................... 4.0 V/1.2 kohms • Power Supply ............................................................. AC 230 V/50 Hz • Power Consumption .................................................................... 250 W Standby Mode ......................................................................... 0.96 W • AC Outlets (Total 100 W maximum) [Europe model] ......................................................... 2 (SWITCHED) [U.K. model] ............................................................ 1 (SWITCHED) • Dimension (W x H x D) ....................................... 435 x 151 x 390 mm • Weight ....................................................................................... 10.0 kg • Accessories ................................................................... Remote Control ........................................................................................... Batteries ............................................................................. AM loop antenna .......................................................................... Indoor FM antenna ..................... 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter (U.K. model only) ...................................................................... Quick Reference Card ............................................................................ Connection Guide ADVANCED OPERATION • Input Sensitivity CD, etc ................................................................... 150 mV/47 kohms 6CH INPUT ........................................................... 150 mV/47 kohms • Tuning Range .............................................................. 531 to 1611 kHz BASIC OPERATION • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) CD, etc. to Main L/R (Effect Off, 250 mV, shorted) ................................................................................ 100 dB or more • Tone Control (Main L/R) BASS Boost/Cut ........................................................... ±10 dB/50 Hz TREBLE Boost/Cut .................................................... ±10 dB/20 kHz PREPARATION • Frequency Response CD, etc. to Main L/R (1 kHz, 150 mV, 8 ohms) ................................................................ 20 Hz to 20 kHz, ±0.5 dB INTRODUCTION AUDIO SECTION * Specifications are subject to change without notice. APPENDIX English 57 0110V520RDS53-62_EN 57 1/31/1, 4:24 PM GLOSSARY ■ Dolby Surround ■ LFE 0.1 channel Dolby Surround uses a four analog channel recording system to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: two left and right main channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog (monaural), and a rear channel for special sound effects (monaural). The rear channel reproduces sound within a narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to enhance moving sound effects and directionality. This channel is for the reproduction of low bass signals. The frequency range for this channel is 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a low frequency range compared to the full-range reproduced by the other 5 channels in a Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1 channel systems. ■ Dolby Digital Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you completely independent multi-channel audio. With three front channels (left, center and right), and two rear stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides five full-range audio channels. With an additional channel especially for bass effects, called LFE (low frequency effect), the system has a total of 5.1 channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel). Using two-channel stereo for the rear speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The wide dynamic range (from maximum to minimum volume) reproduced by the five full-range channels and the precise sound orientation generated using digital sound processing provide listeners with previously unheard of excitement and realism. With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up to a 5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment. ■ DTS (Digital Theater Systems) Digital Surround ■ CINEMA DSP ■ SILENT CINEMA YAMAHA has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound field so that accurate representations of all the sound field programs can be enjoyed on headphones. ■ Virtual CINEMA DSP YAMAHA has developed a virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field surround effects even without any rear speakers by using virtual rear speakers. It is even possible to enjoy virtual CINEMA DSP in a minimum two-speaker system that does not include a center speaker. DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog soundtracks of movies with a six-channel digital sound track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie theaters around the world. Digital Theater Systems Inc. has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of DTS digital surround in your home. This system is practically distortion-free, clear 6-channel sound (technically, a left, right and center channels, two rear channels, plus an LFE 0.1 channel as a subwoofer, for a total of 5.1 channels). 58 0110V520RDS53-62_EN 58 D I G I T A L Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best felt in a theater having many speakers and designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can differ so widely, it’s inevitable that there are differences in the sound heard as well. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, YAMAHA CINEMA DSP uses YAMAHA original sound field technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital and DTS systems to provide the visual and audio experience of movie theater in the listening room of your own home. 1/31/1, 4:24 PM GLOSSARY ■ S VIDEO signal INTRODUCTION With S VIDEO signal system, the video signal normally transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the chrominance through the S VIDEO cable. Using the S VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss and allows recording and playback of even more beautiful images. ■ PCM (Linear PCM) PREPARATION Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without using any compression. This is used as a method of recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per very small unit of time. Standing for “pulse code modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and then modulated for recording. ■ Sampling frequency and number of quantized bits BASIC OPERATION When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times the signal is sampled per second is called the sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when converting the sound level into a numeric value is called the number of quantized bits. The range of rates that can be played back is determined based on the sampling rate, while the dynamic range representing the sound level difference is determined by the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies that can be played back, and the higher the number of quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be reproduced. ADVANCED OPERATION ■ I/O ASSIGN (SET MENU) APPENDIX Although component is normally connected according to jack names shown on the rear panel, this unit includes a function that assigns jacks according to the component being connected. If the component being used differs from the component name shown for this unit’s digital input/ output jacks, it is possible to assign jacks according to the component being connected. This makes it possible to change the jack assignment and effectively connect more component. English 59 0110V520RDS53-62_EN 59 1/31/1, 4:24 PM INDEX A M AC outlets ...................................................................................... 18 Antennas ........................................................................................ 26 B Manufacturer codes .................................................................... 48, i Memory back-up ............................................................... 28, 36, 41 MEM. GUARD (SET MENU) ...................................................... 39 Muting ........................................................................................... 22 BALANCE .................................................................................... 22 BGV function ................................................................................ 22 P C CBL/SAT mode ............................................................................. 47 CD mode ........................................................................................ 45 CINEMA DSP ......................................................................... 50, 58 Connections Antennas ................................................................................. 26 Audio components (MD recorder, CD recorder and CD player) .............................................................................. 12 External decoder ..................................................................... 12 Power supply cords ................................................................ 18 Speakers ................................................................................. 16 Video components (DVD player, VCR and TV/digital TV or cable TV/satellite tuner) ............................. 14 D Delay time ..................................................................................... 40 Display ............................................................................................. 8 DISPLAY SET (SET MENU) DIMMER ............................................................................... 39 DOLBY D. SET (SET MENU) D-RANGE .............................................................................. 38 LFE LEVEL ........................................................................... 38 Dolby Digital ................................................................................. 58 Dolby Surround (Dolby Pro Logic) ............................................... 58 DSP program CINEMA DSP program .......................................................... 50 Hi-Fi DSP program ................................................................. 50 DTS ............................................................................................... 58 DTS SET (SET MENU) ................................................................ 38 Dust protection cap ........................................................................ 12 DVD/LD mode .............................................................................. 46 DVD MENU mode ........................................................................ 46 E External decoder ............................................................................ 12 F Front panel ....................................................................................... 4 H HP TONE CTRL (SET MENU) .................................................... 37 I IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch ............................................... 18 INPUT MODE (SET MENU) ....................................................... 38 Input modes ................................................................................... 23 I/O ASSIGN (SET MENU) ..................................................... 37, 59 L LFE .................................................................................... 38, 39, 58 Package contents ............................................................................. 3 PCM ............................................................................................... 59 Playing ........................................................................................... 21 Power supply cords ....................................................................... 18 Preset stations Exchanging preset station ....................................................... 30 Tuning in to a preset station ................................................... 29 Presetting tuning Automatic preset tuning ......................................................... 28 Manual preset tuning .............................................................. 29 R RDS stations EON function ......................................................................... 33 PTY SEEK function ............................................................... 32 RDS mode .............................................................................. 31 Rear panel ........................................................................................ 9 Recording ...................................................................................... 34 Remote control Basic operation ......................................................................... 6 Batteries .................................................................................... 3 Operation range ........................................................................ 7 Setup codes ............................................................................. 48 S Sampling frequency ................................................................. 22, 59 SET MENU ................................................................................... 35 SILENT CINEMA ................................................................... 25, 58 Sleep timer ..................................................................................... 42 SP DLY TIME (SET MENU) ........................................................ 39 Speaker Output balance (test tone) ...................................................... 19 Output levels (TIME/LEVEL mode) ...................................... 40 Placement ............................................................................... 10 SPEAKER SET (SET MENU) BASS OUT ............................................................................. 37 CENTER SP ........................................................................... 36 MAIN LVL ............................................................................. 37 MAIN SP ................................................................................ 36 REAR LR SP .......................................................................... 36 Subwoofer ..................................................................................... 17 S VIDEO ....................................................................................... 59 T TAPE/MD mode ............................................................................ 44 Test tone ........................................................................................ 19 Tuning Automatic tuning .................................................................... 27 Manual tuning ........................................................................ 27 TV mode ........................................................................................ 47 V VCR mode ..................................................................................... 47 Virtual CINEMA DSP ............................................................. 25, 58 60 0110V520RDS53-62_EN 60 1/31/1, 4:24 PM LIST OF MANUFACTURER’S CODES LISTES DES CODES FABRICANT VERZEICHNIS DER HERSTELLERCODES LISTA ÖVER TILLVERKARKODER ELENCO DEI CODICI DEL FABBRICANTE LISTA DE CÓDIGOS DE FABRICANTES LIJST VAN CODES VAN FABRIKANT Clarivox 0821, 0961, 1971 Clatronic 1181, 1331 Concerto 0791 Condor 0761 Contec 0151, 1171 Continental Edison 0571, 0651, 0901 Craig 1171 Crosley 0021, 0491, 1021, 1081, 1401, 1981, 2201, 2251, 2271 Crown 2541 Ctc Clatronic 0261 CXC 1171 Daewoo 0101, 1501, 1511, 2611 Dansai 0101 Decca 0271, 0581, 0601, 0971, 1101, 1691 Decca (UK) 0271, 0581, 0601, 1101, 1681 Degraaf 0451, 1351 Dixi 0991, 1511 Domeos 0101 Doric 1031 Dual 0091, 0601, 1611, 1641, 2101 Dual-Tec 0601, 1511, 1621, 2111 Dumont 0261, 0521, 0781, 1021, 1081, 1981, 2121, 2151 Dynatron 0101 Elbe 1551, 1971, 2031 Electro Tech 1511 Elektronska 0771 Elman 0261, 1621 Elta 1511 Emerson 0921, 1021, 1081, 1121, 1171, 1261, 1301 Erres 0101 Etron 1981 Europhon 0261, 0581, 0601, 0771, 1091, 1621, 2001 Fenner 0101, 1511 Ferguson 0281, 0371, 0551, 0651, 0781, 0861, 0881, 1131, 1181, 1361, 1461, 1971, 1991, 2281, 2311, 2341 Fidelity 0451, 0761, 2281 Fidelity (UK) 0561, 0591, 1931, 2281 Filmnet 1141 Finlandia 0451, 2321 Finlux 0021, 0261, 0491, 0521, 0781, 0811, 0871, 1081, 1411, 1421, 1981, 2051, 2091, 2121, 2151, 2551 TV Admiral 0411, 0451, 0911, 1021, 1081 Aiko 0891 Akai 0061, 0101, 0231, 1191, 1351, 1591, 1641, 1791, 1891, 1981 Akura 1331 Alba 1241, 1331, 2361 Albiral 1971 Amstrad 1301, 1511 Anam 1171 Arc En Ciel 0571 Arcam 0571, 0761 Aristona 0751 Arthur Martin 0451, 1641 ASA 0411, 0451, 0521, 0781, 0871, 1021, 1081, 1421, 2051, 2091, 2151, 2551 Astra 1511 Atantic 0761 Atlantic 0761 Atori 1511 Audiosonic 1181, 1321, 1511 Ausind 0491, 1411 Autovox 0091, 0351, 0481, 0491, 0601, 0781, 0951, 1051, 1081, 1391, 1421 Baird 1101, 1351 Bang & Olufsen 1081 Basic Line 1321, 1331 Bauer 1451 Baur 0041, 0061, 0121, 0131, 0221, 1561 Beko 2491, 2501 Blaupunkt 0221, 0231, 0241, 0251, 0471, 0741, 2201, 2211, 2221, 2231, 2241, 2261, 2571, 2581 Brandt 0571, 0651, 0731, 0901, 1821 Brionvega 1021, 1051, 1081 Britannia 0761 Bruns 0821, 0991, 1021, 1081 BSR 0391, 0691, 1621, 1901, 1981 Bush 0451, 1241, 1331, 1641, 1741, 2131, 2151 Bush (UK) 0481, 1561, 1611 Candle 0791 Century 1021, 1081 CGE 0491, 0811, 0981, 1401, 1531, 1611, 1621, 1981, 2201, 2251, 2271 Citizen 0791 First Line Fisher 1981 0021, 0091, 0141, 0511, 0601, 0801, 0821, 0981, 1021, 1081, 1981, 2091 Forgestone 2281 Formenti 0451, 0491, 0761, 1081, 1451, 1541, 1981 Formenti-phoenix 0021, 0431, 0451, 0591, 1411 Fortress 1081 Frontech 0451, 1181, 1981 Fujitsu 1261 Funai 0391, 0691, 1171, 1181, 1261 Futuretech 1171 GBC 0021, 0141, 1321, 1511, 1621, 1981 GEC 0451, 1101, 1281, 2321 GEC (UK) 0031, 0081, 0581, 0601, 1101, 1281, 1561 Geloso 0021, 0411, 0451, 1321, 1511, 1621, 1981 General Technic 2681 Genexxa 0451, 1331 GoldStar 0591, 0601, 0761, 0791, 1371, 1491, 1511, 1561, 1621, 1641 Goodmans 0141, 1101, 1371, 1641, 2301 Gorenje 0981, 1061 Graetz 0451 Granada 0141, 0451, 0491, 0581, 0601, 1101, 1111, 1351, 1981, 2321 Granada (UK) 0081, 0141, 0451, 0491, 0581, 0601, 1031, 1311, 1521, 1561, 1641 Grundig 0221, 0231, 0471, 0491, 0711, 0741, 1381, 2021, 2041, 2141, 2151 Hanseatic 0021, 0121, 0141, 0431, 0591, 1561 Hantarex 0581 Hemmermann 0061 Hifivox 0331, 0571 Hinari 0071, 0141, 0451, 1261, 1351, 1511, 1641, 1981, 2011 Hitachi Hyper Imperial Ingersol Inno Hit Innovation Interfunk Irradio Isukai ITT ITT-nokia JVC (Victor) Kaisui Kamosonic Karcher Kawasho Kendo Kennedy 0001, 0011, 0031, 0081, 0141, 0291, 0331, 0341, 0451, 0601, 0631, 0701, 1281, 1561, 1601, 1821, 1831, 1841, 1861, 1871, 1881, 1891, 1941, 1981, 2051, 2321, 2341 0591, 0601, 1511, 1621 0451, 0491, 0811, 0981, 1401, 1611, 1621, 2201, 2251, 2271 1511 0581, 0601, 0841, 1101, 1331, 1371, 1511, 2011 2591, 2601, 2611, 2621, 2641, 2651, 2661, 2711, 2721, 2761, 2771, 2781 0031, 0041, 0061, 0121, 0181, 0451, 0491, 1081, 1641, 1791, 1821, 1981, 2231 0491, 1321, 1331, 1371, 1411, 1511, 2011 1331 0031, 0041, 0051, 0061, 0071, 0081, 0181, 0411, 0451, 0491, 1241, 1291, 1351, 1501, 1601, 1641, 1741, 1921, 1981, 2091, 2331, 2431 0031, 0041, 0051, 0061, 0071, 0081, 0181, 0411, 0451, 0491, 1241, 1291, 1351, 1501, 1601, 1641, 1741, 1921, 1981, 2091, 2331, 2431 0071, 0721, 1441, 1581, 1591, 1741, 1791 0591, 1321, 1331 0601 0591, 0601, 0841, 1091, 1321, 1511, 1561, 2051 0761 0261 0021, 0351, 0951, 1981 i 08V520RDS-code(GB) 1 2/2/1, 5:44 PM NEC 0141, 1711, 1721, 1731 Neckermann 0451, 0601, 0981, 1081, 1561, 1931, 1981, 2211, 2231, 2241 Nediator 0101 Nicamagic 0761 Nikkai 1101, 1331, 1641, 1701, 2011 Nobliko 0261, 0491, 0591, 0641, 1381, 1411 Nogamatic 0571 Nokia 0031, 0041, 0051, 0061, 0071, 0081, 0181, 0411, 0451, 0491, 1241, 1291, 1351, 1501, 1601, 1641, 1741, 1921, 1981, 2091, 2331, 2431, 2461, 2791 Nordmende 0031, 0291, 0331, 0451, 0531, 0541, 0571, 1051, 1131, 1591, 1791, 1811, 1821, 1891, 1941, 2631 Oceanic 0321, 1651, 1981 Oceanic (F) 0031, 0061, 0321, 0441, 1661 Onceas 0601 Onwa 1171 Orion 0061, 0391, 0691, 0851, 1211, 1241, 1251, 1301, 1481, 1511, 1681, 1691, 1981, 2371, 2421 Osaka 2011 Osaki 1101, 1331, 2011 Osume 0151 Otto Versand 0021, 0121, 0141, 0221, 0601, 1561, 1741, 1981 Pael 0591, 1411 Panasonic 0031, 0201, 0211, 0451, 0701, 1311, 1751, 1961, 2561, 2741 Panoramic 2351 Pathe Marconi 0571 Pathe’ Cinema (F) 0431, 0591, 1621, 1661, 1971 Pausa 1511 Pauza 1511 Perdio 0891, 1101 Philco 0021, 0491, 0811, 0981, 1021, 1081, 1401, 1611, 1621, 1751, 2201, 2251, 2271, 2451, 2471 Philips 0101, 0361, 0591, 0621, 0681, 0751, 0761, 1021, 1081, 1281, 2031, 2281, 2291, 2431, 2441, 2511, 2731 Phoenix 1081 Phonola 0751, 1081 Pioneer 0291, 0451, 1341, 1821 Prandoni-prince 0411, 0451, 0491, 0581, 1411 Konka Korting 2701 0431, 1011, 1021, 1081, 1541 KTV 0601, 1171 Lenoir 0601, 1511 Leyeo 1181 Lifetec 2591, 2601, 2611, 2621, 2641, 2651, 2661, 2671, 2681, 2691, 2711, 2761, 2771, 2781 Loewe Opta 0121, 0131, 0581, 0611, 1081 Logic 1691, 2281 Logik 0551, 1681, 2281 Lowewe 0831 Luma 0351, 0451, 1901 Luxman 0791 Luxman Stereo Tuner 0791 Luxor 0001, 0061, 0181, 0341, 0421, 0451, 0461, 0491, 0601, 0671, 1351, 1371, 1561, 1601, 1911, 1921, 1981 Lyco 1181 Magnadyne 0021, 0061, 0261, 0581, 0641, 0771, 1021, 1081, 1621, 1981 Magnafon 0261, 0491, 0581, 0591, 0641, 0761, 1091, 2001 Manesth 0101 Marantz 0101 Marelli 1081 Mark 0101 Matsui 0061, 0451, 0601, 0691, 1101, 1151, 1241, 1271, 1301, 1511, 1561, 1681, 1691 Maximal 0071, 1981 McMichael 1281 Medion 2591, 2601, 2611, 2621, 2641, 2651, 2661, 2671, 2681, 2691, 2711, 2721, 2761, 2771, 2781 Memorex 1511 Metz 0231, 0741, 1001, 1041, 1081, 1481, 2071, 2081 MGA 1231 Micromaxx 2591, 2621, 2641, 2651, 2711, 2761, 2771, 2781 Minerva 0221, 0231, 0491, 1381, 2141, 2151 Mistral 2281 Mitsubishi 0141, 0201, 0231, 0661, 1191, 1201, 1231, 1671, 1691, 1741 Mivar 0491, 0501, 0581, 0591, 0761, 0771, 1371, 1431, 2031 MTC 0791 Multitech 0261, 0581, 0601, 0641, 0981, 1321, 1511 Murphy 0451, 2091 Murphy (UK) 0081, 1031 N.E.I. 0101, 0961 NAD 1341 Prandoni-promce 0451, 0491, 0581 Prima Profex Protech Quelle 0451 1981 0641, 1181, 1981 0041, 0061, 0121, 0221, 0231, 0391, 0491, 0521, 0601, 0781, 1371, 1381, 1411, 1421, 1641, 1681, 2051, 2091, 2141, 2151, 2201, 2211, 2231, 2241, 2251, 2271, 2551, 2571, 2581 Radiomarelli 0101, 0451, 0661, 0771, 1081 Radionette 0031, 2051, 2091 Radiola 2291 Rank 0481, 2151 Rbm 2131, 2151 Rbm (UK) 0481 Rediffusion 0451, 0661, 1641, 1981, 2331 Rediffusion (UK) 0061, 0081, 1031 Rex 0071, 0101, 0351, 0411, 0451, 0951, 1901, 2061, 2101, 2111 Rft 0991, 2511 Roadstar 1321, 1511 Rotel 0151 Saba 0291, 0331, 0421, 0451, 0531, 0541, 0571, 0581, 0651, 0731, 0931, 1021, 1071, 1081, 1131, 1791, 1811, 1821, 1891, 1941, 2631 Saccs 1971 Saisho 0451, 0601, 1161, 1241, 1301, 1511, 1671, 1681, 1691 Salora 0011, 0041, 0061, 0071, 0341, 0451, 0671, 1291, 1351, 1521, 1561, 1601, 1641, 1911, 1921, 1931, 1981, 2321 Sambers 0261, 0491, 0581, 0641, 1091, 1371, 1411, 2001 Samsung 0101, 0601, 0841, 0981, 1101, 1181, 1371, 1511, 2011 Sanyo 0141, 0151, 0401, 0601, 0801, 0821, 0981, 1021, 1101, 1111, 1291, 1351, 1691, 1741, 2051, 2091, 2551 SBR 0681, 0751, 1281, 2281 Schaub Lorenz 0451 Schneider 0021, 0071, 0091, 0451, 0511, 0591, 0601, 0751, 1321, 1361, 1621, 1641, 2101, 2111, 2291 Scott 1171, 1261 SEG 0261, 0601, 0821, 0991 SEI 0641, 0691, 1081, 1301, 1481, 1981 ii 08V520RDS-code(GB) 2 2/2/1, 5:44 PM Seleco Sentra Sharp Siarem Sicatel Siemens Silver Singer Sinudyne Skantic Solavox Sonoko Sony Soundesign SSS Stern Sunkai Supra Tandberg Tandy Tashiko Tatung Tcm Technics Techwood Teknika Tele Teleavia Telefunken Teletech Tempest Tensai Texet Thomson Thorn 0071, 0101, 0351, 0411, 0451, 0951, 1901, 2061, 2101, 2111 1601 0141, 0151, 0191, 1761, 1781 0021, 0261, 0581, 0641, 1021, 1081, 1981 1971 0151, 0221, 0231, 0451, 0741, 2011, 2201, 2211, 2221, 2231, 2241, 2261, 2571, 2581 1181 0021, 0261, 1021, 1081 0101, 0021, 0061, 0261, 0391, 0641, 0691, 0851, 0941, 1021, 1081, 1241, 1301, 1321, 1481, 1631, 1981 0451 0451, 1641, 2011 1181, 1511, 0101 0141, 0171, 1121, 1681, 1691, 2751 1171 1171 0071, 0101, 0351, 0411, 0451, 0951, 1901, 2061, 2101, 2111 0691 0791 0161, 0331, 0611, 1021, 1421, 1771, 1791, 2081 0451, 0191, 1331, 1531 0141 0271, 0581, 0601, 0971, 1101, 1681, 1691 2621, 2641, 2711, 2761, 2771, 2781 1311 0791 1171, 1231, 1261 1141 0571, 0651, 0731, 1821 0291, 0301, 0311, 0551, 0731, 1131, 1471, 1591, 1791, 1801, 1811, 1821, 1991, 2161, 2171, 2181, 2191, 2201, 2251, 2271, 2521, 2631 1511 2381, 2391, 2401, 2411 1331, 2091 0601 0331, 0481, 0531, 0571, 0631, 0651, 0731, 0901, 1241, 1571, 1591, 1791, 1811, 1821, 1891, 1941, 2531 0741, 0861, 2091, 2251, 2271, 2281 Thorn-Ferguson 0281, 0371, 0551, 0651, 0781, 0861, 0881, 1131, 1181, 1361, 1461, 1971, 1991, 2281 TMK 0141, 0791, 1471 Toshiba 0141, 0381, 0481, 1221, 1271, 1701, 1741, 1851, 2151, 2801, 2811 Trans Continens 0451 Tristar 2281 Triumph 0481, 0581, 2121 Uher 0431, 0451, 0481, 0491, 0511, 1311, 1541 Ultravox 0021, 0261, 0591, 1021, 1081, 1981 Universum 1181, 2051 Univox 1971 Vegavox 0811 Vexa 0101, 1511 Videoton 2481 Vortec 0101, 0651 Voxson 0411, 0451, 0491, 1021, 1081 Waltham 0451 Watson 0431, 2201, 2241 Watt Radio 0021, 0061, 0261, 0591, 0641, 0761, 1091, 1971, 1981, 2001 Wega 0141, 1081, 1981 Wega Color 1021 Weltblick 0101 Weston 1621 White Westinghouse 0101, 0261, 0431, 0591, 0761, 1401, 1541 Yoko 0601, 1511 Zanussi 0071, 0101, 0351, 0411, 0451, 0951, 1901, 2061, 2101, 2111 Zoppas 0451 SATELLITE TUNER Akai Alba Amstrad 1276 0826, 1276 0166, 0796, 1016, 1026, 1296 Ankaro 0476 Ast 0406 Astra 0126 Barcom 0476 Blaupunkt 0966 Bmc Satellite 0106 British Telecom 1276 Bush 0826 Bush (UK) 0956 Cambridge 0196, 1276 Chaparral 0016, 0696, 1006 Columbus 0616 Connexions 0306, 0426 Discus Elipse 0856, 0866 Diskxpress 0426, 0476 Drake 1516 Echostar 0226, 0236, 0606, 0626, 0666, 0926, 0996, 1046, 1056, 1066, 1106 Elta 1286 Elta Sat 0146 Eurodec 1226, 1236, 1246 Ferguson 0046, 0176, 0186, 0296, 0846, 0956, 1306 Finlux 0976 Fracarro 0026, 0536, 0776 Fuba 0476, 0616, 0636, 1056 Giucar Record 0206, 0336 Grundig 0176, 0946, 0956, 0966 High Performance 0916 Hirschmann 0756, 0966 Hitachi 0446, 0516, 0706, 0946 Icx International 0886 ITT 0066, 0126, 0176, 0446, 1156 ITT/Nokia 0066, 0126, 0176, 0446, 1156 Jeemon 0146 Jerrold 0846, 0986 Johansson 0246 JVC (Victor) 1276 Kathrein 0116, 0266, 0276, 0366 Kosmos 0266 Kyostar 1036, 1086 Leng 0246 Lifesat 1326, 1346, 1356 Luxor 0126, 0136, 0446, 0466, 0506, 1156 Macab 0356 Maspro 0016, 0116, 0256, 0956 Medion 1326, 1346 Metz 0966 Micromaxx 1326, 1346 Mitsubishi 0966 Morgans 0596 Muratto 0406 NEC 0286, 0316, 0766, 0786, 0836 Network 0046 CABLE Cabletime 1446, 1456, 1476 Clyde Cablevision 1426 Filmnet 1396, 1436 France Telecom 1386 GEC 1426 Jerrold 1416 Movie Time 1466 NSC 1466 Philips 1386 Pioneer 0006 Samsung 1496 Scientific Atlanta 1486, 1506 Starcom 1416 STS 1466 Tele 1436 Tele+1 1436 Teleservice 1406, 1476 Tudi 1376 United Cable 1416 Zenith 1406 Nikko Nokia 1136, 1146 0066, 0126, 0176, 0446, 1156, 1166, 1336 Norsat 0786 Otto Versand 0966 Pace 0046, 0176, 0296, 0936, 0956, 1306 Pace Mss 0946 Palcom 0616, 0686, 0706 Palsat 0396 Paltec 0706 Panasonic 0806, 1306 Pansat 1076 Philips 0326, 0346, 0476, 0956, 1126, 1186, 1196, 1206, 1216, 1306, 1316 Prosat 1176 Ptt Telecom 0306, 0896 Quelle 0966 Radix 1056 Rediffusion 0316, 0786 Rft 1186, 1196, 1206, 1216 Sagem 1256 Sakura 0566, 0816 Salora 0066, 0126, 0136, 0446, 0456, 0486, 0496, 0576 Samsung 0746, 0756 Sat 0406 Satcom 0896 Sateco 0646 Sector 1266 Sedea 1096 Sentra 0416 Siemens 0896, 0966 Sintrack 0906 Skylab 0476 Skyscan 0876 Sony 0736, 0946 Stella 0306 Strong 0156, 0396, 1036, 1086 Stv 0636 Tandberg 1116, 1366 Tandy 0916 Tantec 0616 Tatung 0516, 0546 Technisat 0086, 0096, 0526, 0556, 1056 Telecom 0306 Telemax 0586 Thorn-Ferguson 0046, 0076, 0176, 0186, 0956 Toshiba 0946 Triad 0406 Uniden 0036, 0216, 0676, 0716, 0726 US Electronics 0886 Vortec 0756, 1036, 1076 Vtech 0436 Winersat 0246 Wisi 0056, 0356, 0376, 0386, 0406, 0656, 1056, 1156 Wolsey 0916 Zehnder 0266, 0406 Zender 0406 VCR Aiwa Akai 0042, 0352, 0432 0042, 0422, 0492, 0582, 0612, 0642, 0652, 0762, 0912 Alba 0002, 0112, 0282, 0332, 0342, 0972 Amstrad 0322, 0432, 0452 Anitech 0002 Anitsch 1002 ASA 0012, 0052 Audiosonic 0002 Baird 0042, 0282, 0492 Bang & Olufsen 0042 Baur 0052, 0062, 0812 Blaupunkt 0062, 0092, 0252, 0462, 0672, 0992 Brionvega 0032 Bush 0002, 0282, 0332, 0342, 0512, 0972 Bush (UK) 0812 Capehart 0112 CGE 0042, 0432, 0762 Craig 0072, 0482 Crown 0112, 0282, 1212 Daewoo 0112, 0282, 1212 Dansai 0012 Daytron 0112 Decca 0042, 0052, 0432, 0942 Decca (UK) 0052 Degraaf 0052, 0132, 0432, 0532, 0602 Dixi 0442 Dual 0042, 0632 Dumont 0052, 0432, 0532 Dynatech 0432 Dynatron 0012 Elbe 0122 Elin 0072 Emerson 0012, 0162, 0202, 0432, 0512, 0522 Erres 0012 Ferguson 0042, 0712, 0722, 0852, 0902, 1012, 1022, 1082 Fidelity 0432 Finlandia 0052, 0532 Finlux 0012, 0042, 0052, 0082, 0262, 0382, 0432, 0462, 0492, 0532, 0572, 0602, 0912 First Line 0002, 0912 Fisher 0162, 0482, 0532, 0542, 0572, 0592 Formenti-Phoenix 0012, 0052 Frontech 0112 Funai 0432 GBC 0002 GEC (UK) 0022, 0052 Geloso 0002 General Technic 1172 GoldStar 0012, 0812, 0952, 1202 Goodmans 0002, 0072, 0282, 0432, 0502 Goodmans (UK) 0002 Graetz 0022, 0042 Granada 0052, 0132, 0532, 0572 Granada (UK) 0052, 0092, 0462, 0602, 0812, 0822 iii 08V520RDS-code(GB) 3 2/2/1, 5:44 PM Nordmende 0042, 0102, 0142, 0192, 0222, 0242, 0392, 0402, 0632, 0732, 0742, 0762, 0782, 0792, 0832, 0842, 0872 Olympus 0462 Optonica 0132, 0502 Orion 0162, 0202, 0312, 0442, 0512, 0522, 0982 Osaka 0432 Osaki 0002, 0012, 0432 Otto Versand 0052, 0062, 0812 Panasonic 0022, 0212, 0462, 0672, 0992, 1092, 1102, 1182 Pentax 0172, 0602 Perdio 0432 Philco 1062 Philips 0052, 0082, 0092, 0152, 0182, 0362, 0372, 0472, 0502, 1072 Phonola 0052, 0152 Pilot 0012 Pioneer 0052, 0142, 0372, 0472 Portland 0112 Proline 0432 Pye 0052, 0152 Quartz 0572 Quelle 0012, 0032, 0042, 0052, 0062, 0072, 0092, 0202, 0462, 0552, 0942 Radionette 0022 Realistic 0012, 0072, 0132, 0432, 0482, 0502, 0532, 0572 Ret 1072 Rex 0042, 0742, 0782 Ricoh 0952 Saba 0042, 0142, 0192, 0222, 0242, 0392, 0632, 0732, 0742, 0762, 0772, 0782, 0792, 0872 Saisho 0162, 0202, 0292, 0442, 0512, 0522, 0972 Salora 0192, 0572, 0812, 0822, 0912 Samsung 0052, 0072, 0652, 1192, 1212 Sansui 0042, 0142 Sanyo 0482, 0532, 0562, 0572 SBR 0052, 0152, 0182 Schaub Lorenz 0022, 0042 Schneider 0002, 0012, 0052, 0072, 0432 SEG 0002, 0072 Sei-Sinudyne 0442 Seleco 0042 Sentra 0112 Sharp 0132, 0502, 0702 Shintom 0002 Siemens 0062, 0092, 0252, 0572 Sinudyne 0052, 0382, 0442, 0932 Sonoko 0282 Sony 0432, 0552, 0682, 0692, 0942, 0952, 0962, 1122, 1132 Grundig 0052, 0062, 0092, 0232, 0252, 0262, 0752, 0802 Hanseatic 0052, 0812 Harman/Kardon 0922, 1202 Hcm 0002 Hinari 0002, 0202, 0412, 0442, 0522 Hitachi 0042, 0172, 0292, 0432, 0602, 0662, 0812, 1022 Imperial 0072, 0432 Ingersol 0442 Inno Hit 0002, 0052, 0072 Innovation 1142, 1162, 1172 Interfunk 0022, 0052 Irradio 0002, 0012 ITT 0022, 0032, 0042, 0072, 0292, 0492, 0532, 0572, 0762 ITT-Nokia 0022, 0032, 0042, 0072, 0292, 0492, 0532, 0572, 0762 Jensen 0042 JVC (Victor) 0042, 0102, 0142, 0272, 0742, 0762, 0782, 0902 Karcher 0052, 0072, 0812 Kendo 0492 Kenwood 0042, 0142, 0572 Lifetec 1142, 1162, 1172 Lloyd 0432 Loewe Opta 0052, 0092, 0152 Logik 0002, 0072, 0442 Luma 0162 Luxor 0492, 0572, 0812 M Electronic 0432 Magnadyne 0052 Magnasonic 0572 Manesth 0012 Marantz 0012, 0052, 0092, 0502, 1202 Mark 0012 Marta 0012 Matsui 0012, 0442, 0512, 0522, 0812, 0972 Medion 1142, 1162, 1172 Memorex 0012, 0132, 0432, 0482, 0532, 0572 Metz 0062, 0092, 0932 MGA 0912 Micromaxx 1142, 1162, 1172 Minerva 0062, 0092, 0252 Minolta 0172, 0602 Mitsubishi 0052, 0062, 0142, 0912, 0922 MTC 0072, 0432 Multitech 0002, 0052, 0062, 0282, 0432 Murphy 0432 N.E.I. 0012, 0052 National 0462 NEC 0042, 0122, 0142, 1202 Neckermann 0032, 0042, 0052, 0072, 0092, 0202, 0522, 0572, 0762, 0812 Nikkai 0112 Nobliko 0092 Nokia 0022, 0032, 0042, 0072, 0292, 0492, 0532, 0572, 0762, 1152 STS Sunkai Sunstar Sylvania Symphonic Tandegerg 0602 0512 0432 0432, 0912 0432, 0912 0062, 0162, 0522, 0932 Tashiko 0132, 0432 Tatung 0042, 0052, 0432, 0922 TCM 1142, 1162, 1172 Teac 0042, 0432 Technics 0462 Teknika 0012, 0432 Telefunken 0042, 0192, 0632, 0732, 0742, 0762, 0782, 0882, 0892 Tempest 1032, 1042, 1052 Tenosal 0002 Thomson 0042, 0102, 0142, 0192, 0402, 0632, 0762 Thorn 0042, 0902 Thorn-Ferguson 0042, 0222, 0302, 0712, 0722, 0742, 0762, 0852, 0862, 0872, 0902 TMK 0522 Tonsai 0002 Toshiba 0042, 0622, 0912, 1212 Totevision 0012, 0072 Triumph 0922 Uher 0042, 0072 Ulravox 0032 Unitech 0072 Vector Research 0122 Videon 1162, 1172 Weltblick 0012 White Westinghouse 0032 Xenon 0162 Yamaha 0042, 1202 Yoko 0012, 0062, 0072 DVD PLAYER Akai Denon Hitachi JVC (Victor) Kenwood Magnavox Mitsubishi Onkyo Panasonic Philips Pioneer Proscan RCA Samsung Sharp Sony Technics Thomson Toshiba Yamaha Zenith 0108 0368 0388 0168, 0348 0288 0248 0268 0128, 0248 0048 0188, 0248 0208, 0228 0308 0067, 0308 0148 0068 0028 0048 0328 0088, 0248 0008, 0048, 0188, 0248 0248 iv 08V520RDS-code(GB) 4 2/2/1, 7:24 PM LD PLAYER Aiwa Funai Hitachi Magnavox Panasonic Pioneer Realistic Samsung Sony Victor Yamaha 0137 0137 0047 0077 0027 0037 0137 0017, 0087 0057, 0097, 0107, 0117 0127 0007 CD PLAYER Accuphase Adc Adcom Akai 0315 0865 0785, 1015 0115, 0125, 0725, 0735, 0745, 0935, 1155 Arcam 1875 Arcam-Rotel 0165 Audio-Technica 0835 Audiosonic 0155 Awia 1105, 1235, 1245, 1765, 1915, 1935 BSR 0875 California Audio Lab 1075 Carrera 0555, 0875 Carver 0825, 1415 Cyrus-Rotel 0205 Denon 0045, 0955, 1045, 1595, 1795, 1805 Dual 1005 Elin 0185 Emerson 1015, 1285, 1675 Fisher 0105, 0595, 0605, 0825, 1165, 1175 Genexxa 0525, 0825, 0855, 0875, 0995, 1265, 1285, 1345, 1355, 1485, 1575, 1675, 1715, 1825 GoldStar 0555, 1185, 1195, 1585 Grundig 0175 Harman Kardon 0495, 0565, 0325, 1135, 1145, 1155 Hitachi 0065, 0585, 0685, 0945, 1005, 1015, 1225, 1545 Innovation 1995, 2005, 2015 ITT-Nokia 0185 JVC (Victor) 0385, 0395, 0455, 0575, 0585 Karcher 0485 Kenwood 0025, 0055, 0145, 0215, 0595, 0675, 0695, 0705, 0715, 0925, 1355, 1485, 1575, 1675, 1715, 1825 Korting 0175 Lifetec 2015 Light Control 1155, 1645, 1655, 1665 Linn 0165, 1875 Luxman 0265, 0275, 0795, 0805, 1295, 1305, 1555, 1925 Luxor 0185, 1895, 1905 Magnavox 1865, 1875 Marantz Matsushita MCS Medion Memorex MGA Micromaxx Mission Mitsubishi NAD Nakamichi NEC Neckerman Nikko Oceanic Okano Onkyo Panasonic Philips Pioneer Proton Quasar Radiola Radiotone Realistic Rotel Saba SAE Salora Sansui Sanyo Schneider Scott Sharp Sherwood Siemens Signature Sony Sytvania Tandberg Tashiko TCM Teac Technics Telefunken Theta Digital Thomson Toshiba Vector Research 0555, 0865 Yamaha 0005, 0015, 0085, 0345, 0615, 0655, 0815, 0835, 0895 0165, 0175, 0545, 0665, 1275, 1335, 1405, 1505, 1875, 1955 1095, 1605 0535 0075, 1995, 2005, 2015 0525, 1015, 1265, 1275, 1285, 1675 1125 2015 0165, 1875 1125, 1205 0255, 0285, 0295, 0305, 0345, 0135, 0755, 0765, 1315, 1325 0635, 0645, 1565 0405, 0535, 0775, 0785 0155, 0225 0835, 1165 0185 0155, 0225 0885, 1385, 1425, 1455, 1515 1055, 1075, 1615, 1625 0165, 0175, 0195, 1865, 1875 0095, 0335, 0425, 0435, 0445, 0525, 0855, 1035, 1945 0905, 1875 1075 1845, 1855 0485 0825, 1015, 1265, 1275, 1285, 1575 1875 1005 1875 0185 0415, 0965, 0975, 0985, 1255, 1675, 1875 0625, 0825, 0845, 0915 1845, 1855 1285, 1675 0025, 0035, 1025, 1115, 1275, 1635, 1785, 1815, 1825, 1835 1275, 1445 1085 1155 0345, 0355, 0365, 0375, 0865, 1685, 1695, 1705, 1715, 1725, 1735, 1745 1875 1885 1525 1985, 2015 0235, 0245, 1275, 1365, 1375, 1395, 1435, 1465, 1475 0465, 0475, 1065, 1075, 1625 1005 1865 1005 0755, 0765 CD-RECORDER/CD-RW Hitachi JVC (Victor) Marantz Philips Pioneer Yamaha 0304 0334 0314, 0324 0274 0284, 0294 0244 MD RECORDER Kenwood Pioneer Sharp Sony Yamaha 0214 0254 0264 0224 0024, 0224, 0234 TAPE DECK Akai Denon Grundig Harman JVC (Victor) Kenwood Korting Luxman Marantz NAD Onkyo Philips Pioneer Sony Yamaha 0124 0204 0134 0044 0194 0164 0134 0054, 0064, 0074, 0084 0134, 0144 0174 0184 0134, 0144, 0154 0034, 0114 0094, 0104 0004, 0014 v 08V520RDS-code(GB) 5 2/2/1, 5:44 PM GB RX-V520RDS YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA 00RX-V520RDS(ML)-cv1/4 1 RX-V520RDS Natural Sound AV Receiver Ampli-tuner audio-vidéo OWNER’S MANUAL MODE D’EMPLOI BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG BRUKSANVISNING MANUALE DI ISTRUZIONI MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING Printed in Malaysia ID V723020 2/1/1, 4:41 PM Connection Guide (when listening to a digital 5.1-channel source) Main speakers A DVD player OPTICAL AUDIO OUT L S VIDEO OUT Main speakers B VIDEO OUT R R OPTICAL OUT S VIDEO OUT AUDIO OUT L O L R L VIDEO OUT R V S DIGITAL INPUT CD R TUNER AM ANT GND SPEAKERS + — + — L FM ANT A COAXIAL 75 UNBAL. MAIN OPTICAL D-TV/CBL 6CH INPUT MAIN DVD L SURROUND L DVD CENTER D-TV/CBL VIDEO SIGNAL IN VCR 1 OUT B MONITOR OUT VIDEO MD/CD-R CENTER REAR R (SURROUND) L S VIDEO R R SUB WOOFER + OPTICAL MD/CD-R L — R AUX CD IN(PLAY) OUT(REC) MD/CD-R IN DVD D-TV/CBL AUDIO SIGNAL OUT SUB WOOFER OUTPUT VCR 1 S V * RX-V520/RX-V520RDS *HTR-5450/HTR-5450RDS only (U.S.A. model) * VIDEO IN L S VIDEO IN Analog signal S Video signal S DIGITAL OUTPUT R V O Video signal Optical signal Signal flow Video Monitor Subwoofer system Center speaker R L Rear speakers V728210 RX-V520/RX-V420 (ML) Quick Reference Card TAPE/MD AMP(TUNER) Input selector buttons Input selector buttons 6CH INPUT 6CH INPUT 6CH INPUT 6CH INPUT EFFECT PRESET–/+ EFFECT EFFECT DISC SKIP–/+ EFFECT DISC SKIP–/+ VOLUME VOLUME TV VOLUME MUTE SLEEP SLEEP TV INPUT PRG+, PRG– REC/PAUSE PLAY DIR A (TAPE) SKIP– (MD) SET MENU REWIND (TAPE) SEARCH (MD) –/+ TIME/LEVEL POWER Input selector buttons Input selector buttons MUTE DVD/LD POWER POWER POWER A/B/C/D/E TEST CD VOLUME TV VOLUME DISPLAY (MD) DECK A/B (TAPE) PAUSE (MD) DIR B (TAPE) SKIP+ (MD) VOLUME TV VOLUME MUTE SLEEP DISPLAY TV INPUT PAUSE PLAY SKIP– SKIP+ SEARCH FAST FORWARD (TAPE) SEARCH (MD) STOP SEARCH STOP MUTE SLEEP PLAY SKIP– SEARCH TV VOLUME DISPLAY TV INPUT PAUSE SKIP+ SEARCH STOP V728130 V520(Q)_Quick 1 2/1/1, 1:37 PM Quick Reference Card VCR DVD MENU VCR POWER POWER Numeric buttons CLEAR +10 DISC SKIP–/+ VOLUME MUTE RETURN MENU SELECT MENU LEFT TITLE CBL/SAT TV VOLUME INDEX TV INPUT MENU UP CBL/SAT POWER MENU DOWN CHANNEL MUTE TV SLEEP *1 VCR REC VCR PLAY EFFECT CHANNEL ENTER VCR REWIND TV SLEEP 2 DISPLAY TV INPUT MENU UP MENU SELECT MENU LEFT VCR STOP CHANNEL TV CHANNEL–/+ VOLUME TV MUTE TV SLEEP *1 VCR REC VCR PLAY EFFECT CHANNEL ENTER TV VOLUME DISPLAY TV INPUT VCR PAUSE MENU RIGHT VCR FAST FORWARD *1 Press this button twice to start recording. Appuyer deux fois sur cette touche pour commencer l’enregistrement. Drücken Sie diese Taste zweimal, um die Aufnahme zu starten. Tryck två gånger på den här knappen för att börja spela in. V520(Q)_Quick TV VOLUME MUTE DISPLAY TV INPUT VCR PAUSE +100 CHANNEL ENTER CBL/SAT CHANNEL–/+ VOLUME TV VOLUME MENU RIGHT MENU TV POWER CHANNEL VCR CHANNEL–/+ VOLUME TV MENU RECALL VCR REWIND MENU DOWN Premere due volte questo tasto per iniziare la registrazione. Presione dos veces este botón para empezar a grabar. Druk tweemaal op deze toets om met opnemen te beginnen. 2/1/1, 1:38 PM VCR FAST FORWARD VCR STOP V728130-
1
-
2
-
3
-
4
-
5
-
6
-
7
-
8
-
9
-
10
-
11
-
12
-
13
-
14
-
15
-
16
-
17
-
18
-
19
-
20
-
21
-
22
-
23
-
24
-
25
-
26
-
27
-
28
-
29
-
30
-
31
-
32
-
33
-
34
-
35
-
36
-
37
-
38
-
39
-
40
-
41
-
42
-
43
-
44
-
45
-
46
-
47
-
48
-
49
-
50
-
51
-
52
-
53
-
54
-
55
-
56
-
57
-
58
-
59
-
60
-
61
-
62
-
63
-
64
-
65
-
66
-
67
-
68
-
69
-
70
-
71
Yamaha RX-V520RDS Manual de usuario
- Categoría
- Receptores AV
- Tipo
- Manual de usuario
En otros idiomas
- français: Yamaha RX-V520RDS Manuel utilisateur
- italiano: Yamaha RX-V520RDS Manuale utente
- English: Yamaha RX-V520RDS User manual
- Deutsch: Yamaha RX-V520RDS Benutzerhandbuch
- русский: Yamaha RX-V520RDS Руководство пользователя
- Nederlands: Yamaha RX-V520RDS Handleiding
- português: Yamaha RX-V520RDS Manual do usuário
- dansk: Yamaha RX-V520RDS Brugermanual
- polski: Yamaha RX-V520RDS Instrukcja obsługi
- čeština: Yamaha RX-V520RDS Uživatelský manuál
- svenska: Yamaha RX-V520RDS Användarmanual
- Türkçe: Yamaha RX-V520RDS Kullanım kılavuzu
- suomi: Yamaha RX-V520RDS Ohjekirja
- română: Yamaha RX-V520RDS Manual de utilizare
Documentos relacionados
-
Yamaha RX-V800RDS El manual del propietario
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Yamaha DVX-S100 El manual del propietario
-
-